Upload
phunglien
View
269
Download
6
Embed Size (px)
Citation preview
GE Fanuc Automation
Computer Numerical Control Products Series 18i-LNA Connection Manual (Hardware) GFZ-63393EN/02 February 2003
GFL-001
Warnings, Cautions, and Notesas Used in this Publication
Warning
Warning notices are used in this publication to emphasize that hazardous voltages, currents,temperatures, or other conditions that could cause personal injury exist in this equipment ormay be associated with its use.
In situations where inattention could cause either personal injury or damage to equipment, aWarning notice is used.
Caution
Caution notices are used where equipment might be damaged if care is not taken.
NoteNotes merely call attention to information that is especially significant to understanding andoperating the equipment.
This document is based on information available at the time of its publication. While effortshave been made to be accurate, the information contained herein does not purport to cover alldetails or variations in hardware or software, nor to provide for every possible contingency inconnection with installation, operation, or maintenance. Features may be described hereinwhich are not present in all hardware and software systems. GE Fanuc Automation assumesno obligation of notice to holders of this document with respect to changes subsequently made.
GE Fanuc Automation makes no representation or warranty, expressed, implied, or statutorywith respect to, and assumes no responsibility for the accuracy, completeness, sufficiency, orusefulness of the information contained herein. No warranties of merchantability or fitness forpurpose shall apply.
©Copyright 2003 GE Fanuc Automation North America, Inc.
All Rights Reserved.
B–63393EN/02 DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE
s–1
DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE
This manual includes safety precautions for protecting the user and preventing damage to themachine. Precautions are classified into Warning and Caution according to their bearing on safety.Also, supplementary information is described as a Note. Read the Warning, Caution, and Notethoroughly before attempting to use the machine.
WARNING
Applied when there is a danger of the user being injured or when there is a danger of both the userbeing injured and the equipment being damaged if the approved procedure is not observed.
CAUTION
Applied when there is a danger of the equipment being damaged, if the approved procedure is notobserved.
NOTE
The Note is used to indicate supplementary information other than Warning and Caution.
Read this manual carefully, and store it in a safe place.
B–63393EN/02 PREFACE
p–1
PREFACE
This manual describes the electrical and structural specifications requiredfor connecting the CNC control unit to a machine tool. The manualoutlines the components commonly used for FANUC CNC control units,as shown in the configuration diagram in Chapter 2, and suppliesadditional information on using these components. Refer to individualmanuals for the detailed specifications of each component.Connect and install devices according to the instructions in thisconnection manual.The models covered by this manual, and their abbreviations, are:
Product Name Abbreviations
FANUC Series 18i–LNA 18i–LNA
PREFACE B–63393EN/02
p–2
This manual consists of chapters 1 through 14 and appendixes.
Chapter No. and title Description
CHAPTER 1CONFIGURATION
Summarizes connection of the Series 18i–LNA and provides a guideline to detailinformation.
CHAPTER 2TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAMS
Describes how to connect the Series 18i–LNA and peripheral units.
CHAPTER 3INSTALLATION
Describes the conditions for installing the Series 18i–LNA.
1) Power supply capacity
2) Heat output
3) Connector locations on the control unit
4) Action against noise
CHAPTER 4POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION
Describes the connection of the power supply of the Series 18i–LNA.
CHAPTER 5CONNEDCTION TO CNCPERIPHERALS
Describes how to connect the Series 18i–LNA and the following peripheral units:
1) LCD unit
2) Input/output unit (RS–232–C)
CHAPTER 6SPINDLE CONNECTION
Describes how to connect the Series 18i–LNA and spindle–related units.
CHAPTER 7SERVO INTERFACE
Describes how to connect the Series 18i–LNA and servo units.
CHAPTER 8CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
Describes how to connect machine interface I/O signals through FANUC I/O Link.
CHAPTER 9EMERGENCY STOP SIGNAL
Describes how to use the emergency stop signal.All users must read this chapter.
CHAPTER 10HIGH–SPEED SERIAL BUS (HSSB)
Describes the high–speed serial bus (HSSB) that can be used with the Series18i–LNA.
CHAPTER 11PLC INTERFACE BOARD
Describes how to connect the I/O signals on the PLC interface board.
CHAPTER 12DeviceNet BOARD
Describes the DeviceNet board.
CHAPTER 13FL–net BOARD
Describes the FL–net board.
CHAPTER 14M–NET BOARD
Describes the M–NET board.
APPENDIX A) External dimensions of each unit
B) 20–pin interface connectors and cables
C) Connection cable
D) Optical cable
E) Touch panel for 10.4” LCD unit (with the touch panel and operator’s panel I/O)
F) PCMCIA interface
Organization of thismanual
B–63393EN/02 PREFACE
p–3
The table below lists manuals related to Series 18i–LNA.In the table, this manual is marked with an asterisk (*).
Table 1 Manuals Related
Manual name SpecificationNumber
CONNECTION MANUAL (HARDWARE) B–63393EN *
CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) B–63393EN–1
OPERATOR’S MANUAL B–63394EN
MAINTENANCE MANUAL B–63395EN
PARAMETER MANUAL B–63400EN
Related manuals of SERVO MOTOR α series, β series
Manual name Specificationnumber
FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR α series DESCRIPTIONS B–65142E
FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR α series PARAMETER MANUAL B–65150E
FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR α series DESCRIPTIONS B–65152E
FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR α series PARAMETER MANUAL
B–65160E
FANUC SERVO AMPLIFIER α series DESCRIPTIONS B–65162E
FANUC SERVO MOTOR α series MAINTENANCE MANUAL B–65165E
The following lists the manuals related to the network.
Manual nameDrawingnumber
FANUC DeviceNet Board OPERATOR’S MANUAL B–63404EN
FANUC FL–net Board OPERATOR’S MANUAL B–63434EN
FANUC Ethernet Board/DATA SERVER BoardOPERATOR’S MANUAL
B–63354EN
The following lists the manuals related to the I/O.
Manual nameDrawingnumber
FANUC I/O Unit–MODEL ACONNECTION MAINTENANCE MANUAL
B–61813E
Related manuals
Related manuals ofSERVO MOTOR α series
Manuals related tonetwork
Manuals related to I/O
PREFACE B–63393EN/02
p–4
The information about the PMC in this connection manual covers only thespecifications unique to the PMC of the FANUC Series 18i–LNA. Forother PMC specifications, refer to the following manuals:
Manual nameDrawingnumber
FANUC PMC MODEL PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/
SB/SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SC/SC3/SC4/NB/NB2/NB6
Ladder Language PROGRAMMING MANUAL
B–61863E
Related manuals forPMC
B–63393EN/02 Table of Contents
c–1
DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE s–1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PREFACE p–1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1. CONFIGURATION 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1 CONTROL UNIT CONFIGURATION AND COMPONENT NAMES 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.1.1 Configurations of Stand–alone Type Control Units 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2 HARDWARE OVERVIEW 8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2. TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAMS 9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1 WHEN THE 10.4″ LCD UNIT
(WITH TOUCH PANEL AND OPERATOR’S PANEL I/O) IS USED 10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2 WHEN THE DETACHABLE LCD/MDI IS USED 12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3. INSTALLATION 13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1 ENVIRONMENT FOR INSTALLATION 14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.1.1 Environmental Requirements 14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2 POWER SUPPLY CAPACITY 15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2.1 Power Supply Capacities of CNC–related Units 15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3 DESIGN AND INSTALLATION CONDITIONS OF THE MACHINE TOOL MAGNETIC CABINET 16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4 THERMAL DESIGN OF THE CABINET 18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4.1 Temperature Rise within the Cabinet 18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4.2 Cooling by Heat Exchanger 18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4.3 Heat Output of Each Unit 19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4.4 Thermal Design of Operator’s Panel 20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.5 ACTION AGAINST NOISE 21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5.1 Separating Signal Lines 21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5.2 Ground 23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5.3 Connecting the Ground Terminal of the Control Unit 24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5.4 Noise Suppressor 25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5.5 Cable Clamp and Shield Processing 26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.6 CONTROL UNIT 29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.6.1 Installing the Control Unit 29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.7 CABLING DIAGRAM 31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4. POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION 32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1 GENERAL 33. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2 TURNING ON AND OFF THE POWER TO THE CONTROL UNIT 34. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.1 Power Supply for the Control Unit 34. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.2 Specifications and Circuit Configuration of External 24–VDC Power Supply 34. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.3 Power–on Sequence 37. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.4 Power–off Sequence 38. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3 CABLE FOR POWER SUPPLY TO CONTROL UNIT 39. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4 BATTERIES 40. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4.1 Battery for Memory Backup (3VDC) 40. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4.2 Battery for Absolute Pulse Coder Built into the Motor (6 VDC) 42. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B–63393EN/02Table of Contents
c–2
5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS 43. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1 CONNECTION WITH THE LCD UNIT 44. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.1.1 Overview 44. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1.2 Connection with the 10.4″ LCD Unit (with the Touch Panel and Operator’s Panel I/O) 45. . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1.3 Connection with the Detachable LCD/MDI 48. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2 CONNECTION WITH INPUT/OUTPUT DEVICES 58. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2.1 Overview 58. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2.2 RS–232–C Serial Port 58. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2.3 RS–232–C Interface Specification 60. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6. SPINDLE CONNECTION 69. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1 SERIAL SPINDLE 70. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.1.1 Connection of One to Two Serial Spindles 70. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7. SERVO INTERFACE 72. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1 SERVO INTERFACE 73. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.1 General 73. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1.2 Interface to the Servo Amplifiers 73. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1.3 Connecting the Servo Check Adapter 74. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O LINK 76. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.1 GENERAL 77. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.2 CONNECTION 78. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2.1 Connection of FANUC I/O Link by Electric Cable 79. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2.2 Connection of FANUC I/O Link Optical Cable 80. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.3 UNITS THAT CAN BE CONNECTED USING FANUC I/O LINK 83. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.4 I/O CONNECTION OF THE SERIES 18i–LNA 84. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.5 CONNECTION OF THE CONNECTOR PANEL 93. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.5.1 Overview 93. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.5.2 Connector Panel I/O Modules Used 93. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.5.3 Connection Diagram 96. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.5.4 Power Supply Connection 97. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.5.5 Connection Example of Relay Pins 98. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.5.6 I/O Link Assignment 99. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.5.7 Signal Connections 101. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.5.7.1 Pin assignment 101. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.5.7.2 Input signal connection 103. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.5.7.3 Output signal connection 109. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.5.8 Input/Output Signal Specifications 112. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.5.9 2 A Output DO Signal Specifications 114. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.5.10 Outline Drawing 115. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.5.11 Checking the Input and Output Signals 116. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.5.12 Connection of Basic and Extension Modules 117. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.5.13 Other Notes 118. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.6 OPERATOR’S PANEL I/O CONNECTION FOR 10.4″ LCD UNIT 121. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.6.1 Connector Layout 121. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.6.2 Overall Connection Diagram 122. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.6.3 I/O Link Assignment 123. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.6.4 Power Supply Connection 123. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.6.5 I/O Connector Pin Assignment 124. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.6.6 Input Signal Connection 125. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.6.7 Output Signal Connection 127. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B–63393EN/02
c–3
8.6.8 Wiring Inside the Operator’s Panel 128. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.6.9 Connection of a Manual Pulse Generator 129. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.6.10 Specifications 131. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.6.11 Other Notes 132. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.7 CONNECTION OF OPERATOR’S PANEL I/O MODULE 133. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.7.1 Overall Connection Diagram 133. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.7.2 Power Connection 134. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.7.3 Manual Pulse Generator Connection 135. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.7.4 Cable Length for Manual Pulse Generator 136. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.7.5 External View 137. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.7.6 Specifications 138. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.7.7 Other Notes 139. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.8 CONNECTION OF FANUC I/O LINK–AS–I CONVERTER 140. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.8.1 Outline 140. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.8.1.1 Strong point 140. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.8.1.2 Ordering specification 140. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.8.1.3 Specification 140. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.8.1.4 Power supply 140. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.8.1.5 Heat value 140. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.8.1.6 Weight 140. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.8.2 Installation 141. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.8.2.1 Environmental conditions 141. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.8.2.2 Outer dimensions 141. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.8.2.3 Arrangement of connector 142. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.8.2.4 Installation 142. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.8.3 Connection 145. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.8.3.1 General connection diagram 145. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.8.3.2 Connecting Input power source 146. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.8.3.3 Power turn–on/off sequence 146. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.8.3.4 Connection of AS–i terminal 147. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.8.4 DI/DO Map on the I/O Link 148. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.8.5 Details of I/O Link DI/DO 149. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.8.5.1 input / output data area 149. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.8.5.2 AS–i status 150. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.8.5.3 List of slave 151. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.8.6 Command Execution by the Ladder Program 152. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.8.6.1 Commands that can be executed from the ladder program 152. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.8.6.2 Command interface of ladder program 152. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.8.6.3 Details of command flag and status 153. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.8.6.4 Error code 153. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.8.6.5 An order of command handshake 154. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.8.6.6 Details of commands 154. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.8.7 LED Display and Setting Switch Operation 156. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.8.7.1 LED display 157. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.8.7.2 7 segments LED display 157. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.8.7.3 Setting switch 158. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.8.8 Dealing with Errors 159. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.8.9 How to use I/O Link – AS–i Converter 161. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.8.9.1 Installation 161. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.8.9.2 Normal operation 162. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B–63393EN/02Table of Contents
c–4
8.8.10 CE Marking 167. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9. EMERGENCY STOP SIGNAL 168. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.HIGH–SPEED SERIAL BUS (HSSB) 171. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1 OVERVIEW 172. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.2 CAUTIONS 172. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.3 PERSONAL COMPUTER SPECIFICATION 173. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.4 INSTALLATION ENVIRONMENT 173. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.5 PROCEDURE FOR INSTALLING PERSONAL COMPUTER INTERFACE BOARDS 174. . . . . . . .
10.6 HANDLING PRECAUTIONS 175. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.7 RECOMMENDED CABLES 175. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.PLC INTERFACE BOARD 176. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.1 OVERVIEW 177. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.2 PLC BOARD CONNECTOR LAYOUT 178. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.3 CONNECTION 179. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.DEVICENET BOARD 184. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.1 OVERVIEW 185. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.2 SPECIFICATIONS 185. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.3 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS 186. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.4 SLAVE AND MASTER FUNCTIONS 186. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.5 CONNECTION 188. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.6 REFRESH TIME 189. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.7 CAUTIONS 189. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.8 ATTACHING/DETACHING DeviceNet BOARD 190. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.FL–net BOARD 192. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.1 OVERVIEW 193. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.2 SPECIFICATIONS 194. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.3 MONITORING PARTICIPATING AND SEPARATED NODES 195. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.4 MISCELLANEOUS 209. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14.M–NET BOARD 210. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.1 OVERVIEW 211. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14.2 SPECIFICATIONS 211. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14.3 INTERFACE CONNECTOR 212. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14.4 CABLE CONNECTION 213. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
APPENDIX
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT AND CONNECTOR 217. . . . . . . . . . . . .
B. 20–PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS AND CABLES 249. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B–63393EN/02
c–5
B.1 OVERVIEW 250. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B.2 ADDITIONAL TARGET MODEL 250. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B.3 BOARD–MOUNTED CONNECTORS 250. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.3.1 Vertical–type Connectors 250. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.3.2 Straight and Right–angled Connectors (for Spring and Screw–fixing Connector Housings) 250. . . . . . . .
B.4 CABLE CONNECTORS 251. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B.5 RECOMMENDED CONNECTORS, APPLICABLE HOUSINGS, AND CABLES 254. . . . . . . . . . . .
C. CONNECTION CABLE (SUPPLIED FROM US) 265. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D. OPTICAL CABLE 267. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E. 10.4″ LCD UNIT (WITH TOUCH PANEL AND OPERATOR’S PANEL I/O) 279. . . . .
F. PCMCIA INTERFACE 281. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B–63393EN/02 1. CONFIGURATION
1
1 CONFIGURATION
B–63393EN/021. CONFIGURATION
2
The configuration and component names of each control unit are shownin the figures given below. This manual explains how to attach theconnectors shown in these figures to devices. The numbers in parentheses( ) in the figures are keyed to the item numbers of the descriptions in thismanual. The numbers in brackets [ ] in the figures are connector numbers.
Series 18i–LNA control units
Slot rack name Option slot Mini slot
Single–slot rack None 2
3–slot rack 2 2
Series 18i–LNA display units
Display Soft key Graphic display
10.4″ LCD unit (withtouch panel andoperator’s panel I/O)
None Provided
Detachable LCD/MDI Provided None
1.1CONTROL UNITCONFIGURATIONAND COMPONENTNAMES
1.1.1Configurations ofStand–alone TypeControl Units
B–63393EN/02 1. CONFIGURATION
3
Control unit
PCMCIAinterface
Mini slot(Cannot used)
Slot 3 Slot 2
Battery(4.4)
Status display LED
RS–232–Cconnector (5.2)
[JD5A]
I/O Link connector(8) [JD1A]
Connector for serialspindle (6) [JA41]
Connector for displaylink (5.1) [JD45]
Power supply connector (4)[CP1, CP2]
LED indicator formaintenance
Rotary switch formaintenance
Connector for 10.4″LCD unit (5)[COP20A]
Servo check boardconnector (7)
[CA54]
Ground terminalfor signal
Servo unit (FSSB)connector (7)
[COP10A]
Mini slot Slot 1Install an option board
for the lower net.
Mini slot Slot 2Install an option board
for the higher net.
Mini slot(Cannot used)
B–63393EN/021. CONFIGURATION
4
Control unit
Sub–CPU board (Option)
Connector for serialspindle (6) [JA41]
Servo check boardconnector (7) [CA54]
Servo unit (FSSB)connector (7)[COP10A]
PLC interface board (Option)
Connector for I/O(11) [(C80)]
Connector for I/O(11) [(C81)]
B–63393EN/02 1. CONFIGURATION
5
Control unit (mini slots)
HSSB board
FL–net board
DeviceNet board
HSSB opticalconnector (10)
FL–net connector
DeviceNetconnector
M–NET board
M–NETconnector
Ethernet board
Ethernetconnector
B–63393EN/021. CONFIGURATION
6
When option boards such as the FL–net board, DeviceNet board, andM–NET board are used, they must be installed in the mini slots by themachine tool builder.Install an option board used for the higher net in the upper mini slot, andinstall an option board for the lower net in the lower mini slot.
Mini slot forthe higher net
Mini slot forthe lower net
Control unit
PLC
FL–net
DeviceNet
I/O
FL–net
I/O
FL–net
I/O
Higher net
Lower net
FL–netboard
DeviceNetboard
DeviceNet
DeviceNet
Installing option boards
Installation example
B–63393EN/02 1. CONFIGURATION
7
10.4″ LCD unit (with a touch panel and operator’s panel I/O)
Liquid crystal display(touch panel)
PCMCIAinterface
Connector for I/O link(lower) connection (8)[JD1B]
Connector forconnection of I/Osignals of operator’spanel (8) [CE56]
Connector for I/O Link(upper) connection (8)[JD1A]
Connector for manualpulse generator (8)[JA60]
LCD connector(5) [COP20B] Fuse
Power supplyconnector (5)[CP1A (right)][CP1B (left)]
Protectivegrounding (PE)terminal
B–63393EN/021. CONFIGURATION
8
To slot 2PLC interface board
PLC interface and I/O
Main CPU board
CPU for controlling CNC· Power supply· Spindle interface· I/O Link· PMC–SB6· RS–232–C· Six–axis servo control· PCMCIA interface· Display interface
HSSB interface board
High–speed serial bus interface(personal computer interface)
1– or 3–slot cabinet
To minislot 1 or 2
Optionslot 3
Sub–CPU board
Sub–CPU for 2–path control· Four–axis servo control· Spindle interface
FL–net board
FL–net function
DeviceNet board
DeviceNet function
To slot 3
To slot 1
Optionslot 2
Slot 1
Mini slot
Mini slot
M–NET board
M–NET function
Ethernet board
Ethernet function
1.2HARDWAREOVERVIEW
B–63393EN/02 2. TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAMS
9
2 TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAMS
2. TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAMS B–63393EN/02
10
24V–IN(CP1)
24V–OUT(CP2)
LCD(COP20A)
R232–1(JD5A)
SPDL&POS(JA41)
FSSB(COP10A)
MCC
SVM
SVM
SVM
SVM
SPM
TB1 CX2A JX1A
TB1 CX2B JX1B
TB1 CX2B JX1B
CX1A TB1 CX2A JX1A
CX1B TB1 JX1B
COP10B
JA7A
JA7B
COP10A
COP10B
COP10A
JF1
JY2
TB2
TB2
CX4CX3CX1A TB2
COP10B
COP10B
COP10A
COP10A
PSM
SV–CHK(CA54)
Control unit
Main CPU board
Circuit breaker
To 2nd spindle Serial spindle motor
Axis 1 servo motor
Position coder
Circuit breaker
Servo card
Axis 2 servo motor
Axis 3 servo motor
Axis 4 servo motor
Up to six axis, (In this figure, a 1–axis amplifier is used.)
Servo check board
AC reactor
Slo
t 1
JD1A
Optical cable
24 VDC power supply
LCD unit (touch panel)
JD1A
JD1B
COP20B
CP1A
CP1B
CA55
JA60
CE56
Manual pulse generator
Operator’spanel
Memory cardConnector panel (connector panel I/O module)
JD1A
JD1B
CE62
CE63
CE64
XT1
Powermagneticscabinet
RS–232C I/O unit
200 VAC
200 VAC
Optical cable
2.1WHEN THE 10.4″ LCDUNIT (WITH TOUCHPANEL ANDOPERATOR’S PANELI/O) IS USED
B–63393EN/02 2. TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAMS
11
Control unit
PLC interface board
Power magnetics cabinet
Servo check board
SVM
SPM
PSM
Spindle motor
Sub axis 1servo motor
Up to four axes.
To second spindle
COP10B
COP10A
SPDL&POS(JA41)
Servo card
FSSB(COP10A)
SV–CHK(CA54)
COP10B
COP10A
COP10B
COP10A
COP10B
COP10A
Sub–CPU board
Optical cable
slot
2sl
ot 3
Position coder
Sub axis 2servo motor
Sub axis 3servo motor
Sub axis 4servo motor
(TBL)
HSSB(COP70)
(CD38N)
HSSB board
Min
i slo
t
DeviceNet board
FL–net board
To another device
To another device
Personal Computer
SVM
SVM
SVM
Optical cable
(C80)
(C81)
NOTE: Up to two option boards formini slots can be installed.
DeviceNet board
To another device
To another device
Min
i slo
tM
ini s
lot
Min
i slo
tM
ini s
lot
(TR)
M–NET board
(CD38L)
Ethernet board
2. TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAMS B–63393EN/02
12
24V–IN(CP1)
24V–OUT(CP2)
Main board
JD1A
24 VDC power supply
Manual pulse generator
I/O module for operator ’s panel
JD1A
JD1B
24 VDC
I/O Link
100 to 200VACpower supply
DetachableLCD/MDI
CA61
CA63
(CRT Link)JD45
CA66
CPA
JA3
NOTE: For other connnections, see Section 2.1.
2.2WHEN THEDETACHABLELCD/MDI IS USED
B–63393EN/02 3. INSTALLATION
13
3 INSTALLATION
3. INSTALLATION B–63393EN/02
14
The peripheral units and the control unit have been designed on theassumption that they are housed in closed cabinets. In this manual“cabinet” refers to the following:
Cabinet manufactured by the machine tool builder for housing thecontrol unit or peripheral units;
Operation pendant, manufactured by the machine tool builder, forhousing the control unit or operator’s panel.
Equivalent to the above.
The environmental conditions when installing these cabinets shallconform to the following table.
Condition
10.4″ LCD unit(with a touch
panel and oper-ator’s panel I/O)
Other types of unit
In operation 0°C to 58°C 0°C to 55°CAmbientTemperature In store or
transportation–20°C to 60°C
Relativehumidity 30% to 95% (no condensation)
In operation 0.5 G or less
Vibration In store or trans-portation
1.0 G or less
In operation Up to 1000 mMeters abovesea level In store or trans-
portationUp to 12000 m
Environment
Inter of units: Each unit should be placed in a cabinet to keepit from pollutants (such as dust, coolant, organic solvents,acid, corrosive gas, amd salt).
Heat sink of outer of cabinet: The heat sinks should beprotected from direct exposure to coolant, lubricant, andmetal chips.
Radiation (ionizing ornonionizing)
If a unit is to be used in an environment where it is likely tobe exposed to radiations (such as microwave, ultravioletrays, laser beams, and X–rays), a shielding provisionshould be available for it.
Section 3.3 describes the installation and design conditions of a cabinetsatisfying these conditions.
3.1ENVIRONMENT FORINSTALLATION
3.1.1EnvironmentalRequirements
B–63393EN/02 3. INSTALLATION
15
The following CNC–related units require an input power supply thatsatisfies the indicated current capacities with a power supply voltage of24 VDC 10%. Here, note that momentary voltage changes and ripplesare also within 10% of the power supply voltage.
Table 3.2.1 (a) Power supply capacity (for control units)
Unit Power supplycapacity Remarks
Control unit 1–slot rack 1.8A (*1, *2)(including mainCPU board) 3–slot rack 1.8A (*1, *2)
HSSB board 0.2A
Sub–CPU board 0.8A
FL–net board 0.3A
DeviceNet board 0.2A
M–NET board 0.3A
Ethernet board 0.3A
PLC interface board 1.5A (*4)
10.4″ LCD unit (with touch panel andoperator’s panel I/O)
1.35A (*3)
NOTE1 Boards in option slots and mini slots are not included.2 When an RS–232–C unit (with power supplied form the NC)
is connected to the RS–232–C port, +1 A is further required.3 Use memory cards that consume no more than 2 W.4 The PLC mounted on the PLC interface board is also
included.
Table 3.2.1 (b) Power supply rating (peripheral units)
Unit Power supply capacity Remarks
MDI unit 0A
Operator’s panel I/Omodule
0.35A
Connector panel I/Omodule (basic)
0.2A+7.3mA×DI
Connector panel I/Omodule (additional)
0.1A+7.3mA×DI
3.2POWER SUPPLYCAPACITY
3.2.1Power SupplyCapacities ofCNC–related Units
3. INSTALLATION B–63393EN/02
16
When a cabinet is designed, it must satisfy the environmental conditionsdescribed in Section 3.1. In addition, the magnetic interference on thescreen, noise resistance, and maintenance requirements must beconsidered. The cabinet design must meet the following conditions :
The cabinet must be fully closed.
The cabinet must be designed to prevent the entry of airbornedust,coolant,and organic solvent.
The cabinet must be designed so that the permissible temperature ofeach unit is not exceeded. For actual heat design, see Section 3.4.
A closed cabinet must be equipped with a fan to circulate the airwithin. (This is not necessary for a unit with fan.)The fan must be adjusted so that the air moves at 0.5 m/sec along thesurface of each installed unit.
CAUTIONIf the air blows directly from the fan to the unit, dust easilyadheres to the unit. This may cause the unit to fail. (Thisis not necessary for a unit with fan.)
For the air to move easily, a clearance of 100 mm is required betweeneach unit and the wall of the cabinet.
Packing materials must be used for the cable port and the door in orderto seal the cabinet.
The display unit must not be installed in such a place that coolantwould directly fall onto the unit. The control unit has a dust–prooffront panel, but the unit should not be placed in a location wherecoolant would directly fall onto it.
Noise must be minimized.As the machine and the CNC unit are reduced in size, the parts thatgenerate noise may be placed near noise–sensitive parts in themagnetics cabinet.The CNC unit is built to protect it from external noise. Cabinet designto minimize noise generation and to prevent it from being transmittedto the CNC unit is necessary. See section 3.6 for details of noiseelimination/management.
When placing units in the cabinet, also consider ease of maintenance.The units should be placed so that they can be checked and replacedeasily when maintenance is performed.
The installation conditions of the connector panel I/O module must besatisfied.To obtain good ventilation in the module, the connector panel I/Omodule must be installed in the direction shown in the followingfigure. Clearances of 100 mm or more both above and below the I/Ounit are required for wiring and ventilation.Equipment radiating too much heat must not be put below theconnector panel I/O module.
3.3DESIGN ANDINSTALLATIONCONDITIONS OF THEMACHINE TOOLMAGNETIC CABINET
B–63393EN/02 3. INSTALLATION
17
Connector panel I/O module (No screws or protrusions shallextend from the bottom of thisunit.)
Bottom
Top
A control unit must be carefully isolated against vibration.The CNC control unit itself may resonate at certain frequencies.Perform a thorough check after mounting the CNC control unit on themachine.
To ensure conformity to the EMC command, refer to “Conforming tothe EMC Command (A–72937).”
3. INSTALLATION B–63393EN/02
18
The internal air temperature of the cabinet increases when the units andparts installed in the cabinet generate heat. Since the generated heat isradiated from the surface of the cabinet, the temperature of the air in thecabinet and the outside air balance at certain heat levels. If the amountof heat generated is constant, the larger the surface area of the cabinet, theless the internal temperature rises. The thermal design of the cabinetrefers to calculating the heat generated in the cabinet, evaluating thesurface area of the cabinet, and enlarging that surface area by installingheat exchangers in the cabinet, if necessary. Such a design method isdescribed in the following subsections.
The cooling capacity of a cabinet made of sheet metal is generally 6 W/°Cper 1m2 surface area, that is, when the 6W heat source is contained in acabinet having a surface area of 1 m2, the temperature of the air in thecabinet rises by 1°C. In this case the surface area of the cabinet refers tothe area useful in cooling , that is, the area obtained by subtracting the areaof the cabinet touching the floor from the total surface area of the cabinet.There are two preconditions : The air in the cabinet must be circuited bythe fun, and the temperature of the air in the cabinet must be almostconstant.The following expression must then be satisfied to limit thedifference in temperature between the air in the cabinet and the outside airto 10°C or less when the temperature in the cabinet rises: Internal heat loss P [W] 6[W/m2⋅°C] × surface area S[m2]×10[°C] of rise in temperature(6 W/°C is applied when the cabinet is large to some extent, in which casean uneven temperature distribution is left in the cabinet even after the airin it is circulated by the fan. When a small cabinet such as an operationpanel is used, 8 W/°C described in Subsection 3.4.4 can be used safely.)For example, a cabinet having a surface area of 4 m2 has a cooling capacityof 24W/°C. To limit the internal temperature increase to 10°C under theseconditions, the internal heat must not exceed 240 W. If the actual internalheat is 320W, however, the temperature in the cabinet rises by 13°C ormore. When this happens, the cooling capacity of the cabinet must beimproved using the heat exchanger described next.
If the temperature rise cannot be limited to the permissible temperatureor lower by the cooling capacity of the cabinet, a heat exchanger must beadded. The heat exchanger forcibly applies the air from both the insideand outside of the cabinet to the cooling fin to obtain effective cooling.The heat exchanger enlarges the surface area.A heat exchanger is to be prepared by the customer.
3.4THERMAL DESIGNOF THE CABINET
3.4.1Temperature Risewithin the Cabinet
3.4.2Cooling by HeatExchanger
B–63393EN/02 3. INSTALLATION
19
Table 3.4.3 (a) Heat output (Control units)
Unit Heat output Remarks
Stand–alone typecontrol unit (includingmain CPU board)
1–slot rack 35W (*1), (*2)
Stand–alone typecontrol unit (includingmain CPU board)
3–slot rack 35W (*1), (*2)
Option board HSSB board 4W
Sub–CPU board 14W
FL–net board 6W
DeviceNet board 5W
M–NET board 6W
Ethernet board 6W
PLC interface board 30W (*3)
10.4″ LCD unit (with touch panel and operator’s panel I/O)
30W (*4)
NOTE1 The heat output values of the boards in the option slots and
mini slots are not included.2 The heat outputs of units connected to the CNC and
memory cards are not included.3 The heat output of the PLC mounted on the PLC interface
board is included.4 The heat output of the operator’s panel I/O function is also
included. (The indicated output value corresponds to when50% of the input signals are turned on.)
Table 3.4.3 (b) Heat output (peripheral units common to LCD–mountedtype and separation type)
Unit Heat output (W) Remarks
MDI unit 0W
Operator’s panel I/O module 12W (*1)
Connector panel I/O module (basic) 8W (*1)
Connector panel I/O module(additional)
5W (*1)
NOTEThe indicated values are when 50% of the module inputsignals are ON.
3.4.3Heat Output of EachUnit
3. INSTALLATION B–63393EN/02
20
With a small cabinet like the operator’s panel, the heat dissipatingcapacity of the cabinet is as shown below, assuming that there is sufficientmixing of the air inside the cabinet.Coated metal surfaces: 8 W/m2°CPlastic surfaces: 3.7 W/m2°CAn example of the thermal design for the cabinet shown in Fig. 3.4.4 isshown below.
Air guidechamber
120–mm square fanmotor (for air mixing)
Machine operator’s panel
Fig. 3.4.4
Assume the following.Thermal exchange rates : Coated metal surfaces 8 W/m2°C
: Plastic surfaces 3.7 W/m2°C: Allowable temperature rise: 13°C higher than the exteriortemperature
Also, assume the following.Dimensions of pendant type cabinet shown in Fig. 3.4.4:
560(W) × 470(H) × 150(D) mmSurface area of metallic sections : 0.5722 m2
Surface area of plastic sections : 0.2632 m2
In this case, the allowable total heat dissipation for the cabinet is: 8 × 0.5722 × 13 + 3.7 × 0.2632 × 13 = 72 W.
3.4.4Thermal Design ofOperator’s Panel
B–63393EN/02 3. INSTALLATION
21
The CNC has been steadily reduced in size using surface–mount andcustom LSI technologies for electronic components. The CNC also isdesigned to be protected from external noise. However, it is difficult tomeasure the level and frequency of noise quantitatively, and noise hasmany uncertain factors. It is important to prevent both noise from beinggenerated and generated noise from being introduced into the CNC. Thisprecaution improves the stability of the CNC machine tool system.The CNC component units are often installed close to the parts generatingnoise in the power magnetics cabinet. Possible noise sources into theCNC are capacitive coupling, electromagnetic induction, and groundloops.When designing the power magnetics cabinet, guard against noise in themachine as described in the following section.
The cables used for the CNC machine tool are classified as listed in thefollowing table:Process the cables in each group as described in the action column.
Group Signal line Action
Primary AC power line Bind the cables in group A
Secondary AC power line separately (Note 1) from groups B
AAC/DC power lines (containing thepower lines for the servo andspindle motors)
and C, or cover group A with anelectromagnetic shield (Note 2).
See Section 3.5.4 and connect
AC/DC solenoidspark killers or diodes with thesolenoid and relay.
AC/DC relaysolenoid and relay.
DC solenoid (24VDC) Connect diodes with DC solenoid
DC relay (24VDC)and relay.
Bind the cables in group B
B
DI/DO cable between the CNC andpower magnetics cabinet
Bind the cables in group Bseparately from group A, or covergroup B with an electromagnetic
BDI/DO cable between the CNC andmachine
shield.
Separate group B as far fromGroup C as possible.
24VDC input power cable of thecontrol unit and peripheral devices.
Group C as possible.
It is more desirable to cover groupB with the shield.
Cable between the CNC and I/OUnit
Bind the cables in group Cseparately from group A, or cover
Cable for position and velocityfeedback
group C with an electromagneticshield.
Cable between the CNC andspindle amplifier
Separate group C as far fromGroup B as possible.
Cable for the position coder Be sure to perform shield
CCable for the manual pulsegenerator
processing in Section 3.5.5.
Cable between the CNC and theMDI (Note 3)
RS–232C and RS–422 interfacecable
Cable for the battery
Other cables to be covered withthe shield
3.5ACTION AGAINSTNOISE
3.5.1Separating SignalLines
3. INSTALLATION B–63393EN/02
22
NOTE1 The groups must be 10 cm or more apart from one another
when binding the cables in each group.2 The electromagnetic shield refers to shielding between
groups with grounded steel plates.3 The shield is not required when the cable between the CNC
and MDI is shorter than 30 cm.
Cable of group A
Spindleamp.
Servoamp.
Controlunit
DuctTooperator’spanel,motor, etc.
Section
Group AGroup B, C
Cover
Cable ofgroup B, C
Cabinet
B–63393EN/02 3. INSTALLATION
23
The CNC machine tool uses the following three types of grounding:
Signal groundingSignal grounding supplies a reference potential (0 V) for electricalsignals.
Grounding for protectionGrounding for protection is performed for safety reasons as well as toshield against external and internal noise. This type of groundingincludes, for example, the equipment frames, cases and panels ofunits, and the shielding on interface cables connecting the equipment.
Protective grounding (PE)Protective grounding (PE) is performed to connect protection groundsprovided for equipment or between units to ground together at onepoint as a grounding system.
Display
DistributedI/O
α amplifier
AC powersupply
24–V powersupply
AC input
PE (ground plate of cabinet)
CNC
Cabinet on machine side
Frame
Frame
Operator’spanel
Path for grounding
Path for protective grounding (PE)
Pendant box
The ground resistance in protective grounding (PE) must be 100 Ω orless (type D grounding).
The cable used for protective grounding (PE) must be of a sufficientcross section to allow current to flow safely into protective ground(PE) if an accident such as a short–circuit occurs. (Generally, a crosssection equal to or greater than that of the AC power cable is required.)
The cable connected to protective ground (PE) must be incorporatedinto the AC power wire such that power cannot be supplied with theground wire disconnected.
3.5.2Ground
Notes on grounding
3. INSTALLATION B–63393EN/02
24
Protection ground (PE)
Single–slot rack Three–slot rack
Signal ground terminal(Faston terminal)
Signal ground terminal
M4 (threaded hole)
M3 (threaded hole)
Ground cable2 mm2 or more
Grounding plate of the cabinet
Connect the 0–V lines of the electronic circuits in the control unit to theground plate of the cabinet via the signal ground terminal.
CAUTIONUse the Faston terminal (FANUC specification:A02B–0166–K330), and use a twisted wire of 2 mm2 ormore not longer than 300 mm. Otherwise, the control unitbecomes very susceptible to noise.
3.5.3Connecting the GroundTerminal of the ControlUnit
B–63393EN/02 3. INSTALLATION
25
The AC/DC solenoid and relay are used in the power magnetics cabinet.A high pulse voltage is caused by coil inductance when these devices areturned on or off.This pulse voltage induced through the cable causes the electronic circuitsto be disturbed.
Use a spark killer consisting of a resistor and capacitor in series. Thistype of spark killer is called a CR spark killer.(Use it under AC)(A varistor is useful in clamping the peak voltage of the pulse voltage,but cannot suppress the sudden rise of the pulse voltage. FANUCtherefore recommends a CR spark killer.)
The reference capacitance and resistance of the spark killer shallconform to the following based on the current (I (A)) and DCresistance of the stationary coil:
1) Resistance (R) : Equivalent DC resistance of the coil
2) Capacitance (C) :20
I2(µF)to
I2
10
I : Current at stationary state of the coil
Equivalent circuit of the spark killerR C
Spark killer
Spark killer
Motor
ACrelay
Mount the noise eliminator near a motor or a relay coil.
Note) Use a CR–type noise eliminator. Varistor–type noise eliminatorsclamp the peak pulse voltage but cannot suppress a sharp rising edge.
Use a diode which can withstand avoltage up to two times the appliedvoltage and a current up to two timesthe applied current.
Diode
DC relay
Diode (used for direct–current circuits)
– +
3.5.4Noise Suppressor
Notes on selecting thespark killer
3. INSTALLATION B–63393EN/02
26
If a cable connected to the CNC, servo amplifier, spindle amplifier, orother device requires shielding, clamp the cable as shown below. Theclamp both supports and shields the cable. Use this clamp to ensure stableoperation of the system.Partially peel out the sheath and expose the shield. Push and clamp bythe plate metal fittings for clamp at the part. The ground plate must bemade by the machine tool builder, and set as follows :
40 to
80
mm
Cable
Metal fittings for clamp
Ground plate
Fig. 3.5.5 (a) Cable clamp (1)
3.5.5Cable Clamp andShield Processing
B–63393EN/02 3. INSTALLATION
27
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
Control unit
Ground plate
Metal fittings for clamp
Shield cover
Machine sideinstallationboard
Fig. 3.5.5 (b) Cable clamp (2)
Prepare ground plate like the following figure.
Mount screw hole
Hole for securing metal fitting clamp
Ground terminal(grounded)
Fig. 3.5.5 (c) Ground plate
For the ground plate, use a metal plate of 2 mm or thicker, which surfaceis plated with nickel.
3. INSTALLATION B–63393EN/02
28
12mm
20mm
8mmGroundplate
Fig. 3.5.5 (d) Ground plate holes
(Reference) Outer drawings of metal fittings for clamp.
17mm
28mm
6mm
Max. 55mm
Fig. 3.5.5 (e) Outer drawings of metal fittings for clamp
Ordering specification for metal fittings for clamp A02B–0124–K001 (8 pieces)
B–63393EN/02 3. INSTALLATION
29
The control unit is equipped with a fan motor.
Air is fed into the bottom of the unit and output from the fan motormounted on the top of the unit.
The spaces shown in Fig. 3.6.1 (areas (A) and (B)) are always required toensure smooth air flow.
Also, adequate service access space is required in front of and at the topof the unit so that printed circuit boards and the fan motor can be replacedeasily if necessary.
There is a spare connector located at the far end (at middle height) on theright side of the control unit. This connector is used for controller testingand other purposes. Therefore, space (area (C)) for handling theconnector is required.
3.6CONTROL UNIT
3.6.1Installing the ControlUnit
3. INSTALLATION B–63393EN/02
30
ÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊ
ÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊ
ÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊ
ÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÔÔ
ÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔ
ÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊ
A A
B B
C
Space for air flow, and access area for fan replacement
Single–slot rack: Approx. 65Three–slot rack: Approx. 180
Access space for spareconnector
Approx. 180
Spare connector
Unit: mmSufficient space forreplacing a printed circuitboard is required.
305038
0
50
80
Fig. 3.6.1
B–63393EN/02 3. INSTALLATION
31
For the cabling diagram, see the control unit configuration andcomponent names in Section 1.1.
3.7CABLING DIAGRAM
4. POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION B–63393EN/02
32
4 POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION
B–63393EN/02 4. POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION
33
This chapter explains the connection of power supply for Series 18i–LNAcontrol unit.
4.1GENERAL
4. POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION B–63393EN/02
34
Supply power (24 VDC) to the control uint from a stabilized externalsources (24 VDC).
200 V AC
Main circuitbreaker
Magneticcontractor
AC line filter
Power supplymodule
Servo amplifiermodule
3–phase 200 VAC forpower line
Single–phase200 VAC forcontrol line
CNC control unit
24 VDCinput
24 VDCoutput
External 24 VDCstabilized power
I/O units, etc.
PSM SVM
10.4″ LCDunit, etc.
Fig. 4.2.1
Specifications of a recommended external 24–VDC power supply(regulated power supply) (The requirements of the UL 1950 standardmust be satisfied.)
Output voltage: Output voltage: 24 VDC 10% (21.6 to 26.4 V)(Including ripple voltage and noise. See thefigure given below.)
Output current: Continuous load current must be the currentconsumption level of the CNC and units orhigher.(At the maximum temperature within thepower magnetics cabinet in which the powersupply is placed)
Load fluctuation (including surge current):The above output voltage range must not beexceeded by any load fluctuations due toexternal DO and so forth.
Instantaneous AC input disconnection hold time:10 ms (for –100%)20 ms (for –50%)
4.2TURNING ON ANDOFF THE POWER TOTHE CONTROL UNIT
4.2.1Power Supply for theControl Unit
4.2.2Specifications andCircuit Configurationof External 24–VDCPower Supply
B–63393EN/02 4. POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION
35
Abruptchangein load
Instantaneousdisconnection (–100
10ms
(–50
20msAC inputvoltage
26.4V
21.6V
Output current
0A
Ripple voltage
Fig. Example of ripple voltage and noise in aswitching power supply
Noise
Noise
26.4V
21.6V
Must be with-in this range
(1) Timing chart Instantaneousdisconnection
Output voltage
Fig. 4.2.2 Timing chart
The circuit configurations shown in <1> and <2> below are prohibited.
<1> Circuit example in which the specified output voltage level cannotbe maintained at instantaneous disconnection (the output voltagedrops to below 21.6 V.)
1
input
input
Rectifier
circuit
Rectifier
circuit
Rectifier circuits perform full–wave rectification by using diodes.
Circuit configuration
Prohibition
4. POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION B–63393EN/02
36
<2> Circuit example in which an abrupt change in load causes the outputvoltage to exceed the output voltage specification (21.6 to 26.4 V)
1
input
input
2
Regulatedpower supply
Regulated
power supply
Device withlarge loadfluctuation
Device withlarge surge
current
In case of <2>, prepare another regulated power supply specially forthe device with abrupt change in load to prevent the change frominfluencing the CNC and other units.
The description of a unit having a 24–VDC power supply, indicatingthat the unit must be turned on at the same time as the CNC or beforethe CNC power–on operation, has been modified as follows: Turn onthe unit at the same time as the CNC. When the unit is turned on atthe same time as the CNC, it is recommended that connections bemade on the same line as shown in Fig. 4.2.2 (b).
Turning on the power at the same time:If the following power–on timing is satisfied, the CNC and units areregarded as being turned on at the same time:
power supplyON
Power supply ofunits (including thePower Mate)
t1 t2ON
ON
ON
t1: 200 ms The units (including the Power Mate) are turned on within200 ms before the power to the CNC is turned on.
t2: –500 ms The units (including the Power Mate) are turned on within500 ms after the power to the CNC is turned on.
Recommendation
B–63393EN/02 4. POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION
37
The description of a unit having a 24–VDC power supply, indicating thatthe unit must be turned off at the same time as the CNC or after the CNCpower–on, remains unchanged. (When power is turned off at the sametime, the power to the unit may be disconnected within 500 ms before thepower to the CNC is turned off.)
Turn on the power to all the units at the same time, or in the followingsequence:
1 Power to the overall machine (200 VAC)2 Amplifier control power supply (200 VAC)3 Power to slave I/O units connected via the I/O Link, power
to the CNC (24 VDC)
“Turning on the power to all the units at the same time” means completingthe power–on operations in 1 and 2 above within 500 ms of performingpower–on of CNC control unit in 3.
The power–on sequence of a detachable LCD/MDI supporting the displaylink is undefined in the power–on sequence of the CNC control unit.
4.2.3Power–on Sequence
4. POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION B–63393EN/02
38
Turn off the power to all the units at the same time, or in the followingsequence:
1 Power to slave I/O units connected via the I/O Link, powerto the CNC (24 VDC)
2 Amplifier control power supply (200 VAC)3 Power to the overall machine (200 VAC)
“Turning off the power to all units at the same time” means completingthe power–off operations of CNC control unit in 2 and 3 above within 500ms before the power–off operation described in 1 above. If the power tothe units indicated in 2 or 3 is turned off other than within 500 ms of thepower in 1 being turned off, alarm information is left in the NC.
The power–on sequence of a detachable LCD/MDI supporting the displaylink is undefined in the power–on sequence of the CNC control unit.
When the power is turned off or when the power is momentarilydisconnected, motor control is disabled. Problems that may be generatedfrom the motor control disabled state should be handled from themachine, as necessary.
For example, when movement along a vertical axis is controlled, a brakeshould be applied to prevent falling. Usually, the brake clamps the motorwhen the servo is not activated or when the motor is not turning. Theclamp is released only when the motor is turning. When servo axis controlis disabled by power–off or momentary power disconnection, the brakeusually clamps the servo motor. In this case, before the relay for clampingoperates, the controlled axis may fall. So, also consider whether thedistance the axis is likely to fall will cause a problem.
4.2.4Power–off Sequence
B–63393EN/02 4. POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION
39
Supply power to the control unit from stabilized external resource(24 VDC).
+24V (1)0V (2)
CP1
Cable
Control unit External power
0V1
3
+24V2
24VDC stabilizedpower 24VDC 10%
AMP Japan1–178288–3 (housing)1–175218–5 (Contact)
Select a source that meets the external power terminal.
Recommended cable : A02B–0124–K830 (5 m)(Crimp terminal of size M3 is available on the external power side)
External power
The 24 VDC input to CP1 can be output from CP2 for use in branching.The connection of CP2 is as shown below. In this case, the external 24VDC power supply should have a rating which is equal to the sum of thecurrent consumed by the control unit and the current used via CP2.
CP2
+24V (1)0V (2)
0V1
3
+24V2
Control unit External device
Cable
CP2AMP JAPAN2–178288–3 (Housing)1–175218–5 (Contact) External device
Select a connector thatmatches the pin layout ofthe external device.
4.3CABLE FOR POWERSUPPLY TOCONTROL UNIT
4. POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION B–63393EN/02
40
In a system using the Series 18i–LNA, batteries are used as follows:
Use Component connected tobattery
Memory backup in the CNC CNC
Preservation of the current position indicatedby the absolute pulse coder built into the motor
Servo amplifier
Part programs, offset data, and system parameters are stored in SRAMmemory in the control unit. The power to the SRAM memory is backedup by a lithium battery mounted on the front panel of the control unit. Theabove data is not lost even when the main battery goes dead. The backupbattery is mounted on the control unit at shipping. This battery canmaintain the contents of memory for about a year.When the voltage of the battery becomes low, alarm message “BAT”blinks on the display and the battery alarm signal is output to the PMC.When this alarm is displayed, replace the battery as soon as possible.If the voltage of the battery becomes any lower, memory can no longerbe backed up. Turning on the power to the control unit in this state causessystem alarm (SRAM parity alarm or SRAM ECC alarm) to occurbecause the contents of memory are lost. Clear the entire memory andreenter data after replacing the battery.
CAUTION1 Be sure to back up the latest data of the SRAM memory to
a memory card or Handy File to protect against a deadbattery or accident.
2 When the 18i–LNA with a setting/display unit not connectedat all times is used, display a battery alarm on the machineoperator’s panel by using the battery alarm signal BTAL.
3 The battery is secured onto the main CPU board. Whenattaching/ detaching the main CPU board with the batteryconnected, back up the latest data beforehand to protectagainst loss of data.
4 If the power to the 18i–LNA is turned off with the batteryremoved, data backup for more than 30 minutes isimpossible. If the battery is removed when the power to the18i–LNA is off, data cannot be backed up.
(1)Prepare a new lithium battery (ordering drawing number:A02B–0200–K102).
(2)Turn the control unit on for about 30 seconds.
(3)Turn the control unit off.
(4)Remove the old battery from the front panel of the control unit. Firstunplug the battery connector then take the battery out of its case.
(5) Insert a new battery and reconnect the connector.
4.4BATTERIES
4.4.1Battery for MemoryBackup (3VDC)
Replacing the battery
B–63393EN/02 4. POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION
41
CAUTION1 Before replacing the battery, check that the latest data of the
SRAM memory is already backed up.2 Turn off the power to the machine before replacing the
battery. Only personnel trained in maintenance and safetycan replace the battery when the power to the machine ison.
3 Complete steps (3) to (5) above within 30 minutes. If thebattery is detached for a long time, the contents of theSRAM memory are lost.
Claw holding the battery
Lithium battery
Battery connector
WARNINGIncorrect battery replacement may cause an explosion. Donot use a battery other than that specified (specification:A02B–0200–K102).
Used batteries must be discarded according to appropriate localordinances or rules. When discarding batteries, insulate them by usingtape and so forth to prevent the battery terminals from short–circuiting.
4. POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION B–63393EN/02
42
The battery for the absolute pulse coder built into the motor is installedin the servo amplifier. For how to connect and replace the battery, referto the following manuals:
FANUC SERVO MOTOR α series Maintenance Manual
NOTE1 Clearly specify the method of reference position return
operation beforehand to protect against a dead battery oraccident. Before replacing the battery, in particular, checkthat the method of reference position return operation isclearly specified.
2 When the 18i–LNA with a display/setting unit not connectedat all times is used, monitor error code signals (ER11 toER68), and display a battery alarm on the machineoperator ’s panel and so forth if an alarm indicating a batteryvoltage drop in the absolute pulse coder is detected.
4.4.2Battery for AbsolutePulse Coder Built intothe Motor (6 VDC)
B–63393EN/02 5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
43
5 CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS B–63393EN/02
44
With the Series 18i–LNA, the following LCD units can be connected:
10.4″ LCD unit(with touch paneland operator’spanel I/O)
Controlunit
Connection with an LCD unit (with the touch panel and operator’s panel I/O)
24VDC, Optional cable
NOTEA display control card supporting the LCD unit is required inthe control unit.
100/200VAC
Connection with a detachable LCD/MDI
Controlunit
Branchconnector Detachable LCD/
MDI
NOTEA display control card supporting the display link is requiredin the control unit.
5.1CONNECTION WITHTHE LCD UNIT
5.1.1Overview
B–63393EN/02 5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
45
COP20A COP20B
CP1A
JA60
CE56
10.4″ LCD Unit(with a touch pan-el and operator’spanel I/O)
Control unit
Optical cable
24VDC power supplyCP2
Manual pulsegenerator
Operator’spanel
5.1.2Connection with the10.4″ LCD Unit (withthe Touch Panel andOperator’s Panel I/O)
5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS B–63393EN/02
46
Optical cable and power supply cable are used to make the connectionbetween the CNC control unit and 10.4″ LCD unit (with the touch paneland operator’s panel I/O) (referred to as the 10.4” LCD unit). For detailsof the optical cable, see Appendix D.
See Subsection 8.6.9.
See Section 8.6.
Shown below is the rear of the 10.4″ LCD unit (with the cover removed):
Inverter printed circuit board
LCD control or operator’s panelI/O printed circuit board
I/O signal connectionCE56
LCD signal COP20B
I/O Link (upper)JD1B
I/O Link (lower)JD1A
Connection to manual pulse generatorJA60
MDI signalinputCA55
For 24–Vbranch–outCP1B
M4 stud for protectivegrounding (PE)This must be connected toground.
24 V inputCP1A
Connection between theCNC control unit andLCD unit
Connection with themanual pulse generator
Connection with theoperator’s panel
Connector layout
B–63393EN/02 5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
47
Feed power to the 10.4″ LCD unit from a CNC control unit.
CP1A
CP1AAMP Japan1–178288–3 (housing)1–175218–5 (contact)
+24V (1)0V (2)
0V1
3
+24V2
10.4″ LCD unit CNC control unit
Cable
+24V (1)0V (2)
CP2AMP Japan1–178288–3 (housing)1–175218–5 (contact)
CP2
0V1
3
+24V2
For distribution, 24 VDC applied to CP1A can be output on CP1B. CP1Bis connected as shown below. In this case, the sum of the current drawnby the LCD unit and that drawn through CP1B needs to be supplied toCP1A from the external 24 VDC power supply.
CP1B
+24V (1)0V (2)
0V1
3
+24V2
LCD unit External device
Cable
CP1BAMP Japan2–178288–3 (housing)1–175218–5 (contact)
External power supply
Select a cable thatmatches the pins of theexternal power supply.
NOTEIf the power to the LCD unit is turned off during CNC systemoperation, a disconnection alarm is issued, stopping theCNC.
Connection of a powersupply to the 10.4″ LCDunit
5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS B–63393EN/02
48
The detachable LCD/MDI consists of an 8.4–inch LCD/MDI unit housedin a portable case.
Display 8.4″ TFT, 40 characters16 lines
Dimensions 445 (W)229 (H)122 (D) (excluding connection cables)
Weight 3.5 kg (excluding connection cables)
Power supply 100 to 240 VAC
Rating 0.5A (at 100 VAC)0.25A (at 200 VAC)
Interface One channel of display link or video signal/MDI signal.Switch–selectable
Keyboard Small–machining type alphabetical keys
Drawing No. A02B–0166–C291#R (excluding connection cables)
NOTE1 The indicated dimensions do not include the protrusions on
the top and side.2 This unit is not provided with cables.
CAUTION1 The operating ambient temperature is 0C to 45C. For
other environment conditions, see Subsection 3.1.1.2 The detachable LCD/MDI unit and cable joint portions are
not waterproof.Ensure that these portions are not exposed directly to anycontaminants.
3 Use the unit in a location that is not subject to noise ormagnetic fields.
4 An aluminum body is used to make the unit lighter. Note thata strong impact to the case may result in deformation.
5.1.3Connection with theDetachable LCD/MDI
Specifications
Notes on useenvironment
B–63393EN/02 5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
49
The detachable LCD/MDI is connected to the 18i–LNA as shown in thediagram below. When the 10.4″ LCD unit (with a touch panel andoperator’s panel I/O function) described in the previous section isconnected, the detachable LCD/MDI unit cannot be used.
Before connection to the Power Mate i–LNA, connect cables J167 andJ169 to the detachable LCD/MDI unit.
In the cabinet, connect cable J166 to the CNC, and connect J168 to thepower supply. On the relay panel, install connectors CA66 and CPA.
18i–LNA
JD45J167
J169
CA62
M51J171
CA61
CA63
CA66
CPA
J176
J168100/200 VAC
Cabinet
Relay panel
Selection switchSW1
DetachableLCD/MDI
Display link
Connection method
(1)Set selection switch SW1 of the detachable LCD/MDI unit to B.Selection switch SW1 is labeled as follows:
(2)Attach the connector of signal cable J167 to connector CA66 on therelay panel.
(3)Attach the connector of power supply cable J169 to connector CPA onthe relay panel.
Removal method
(1)Unplug the connector of power supply cable J169 from connector CPAon the relay panel.
(2)Unplug the connector of serial signal cable J167 from connector CA66on the relay panel.
Connection to the Series18i – LNA
5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS B–63393EN/02
50
NOTE1 It is recommended that the label specified by FANUC be
attached to near connector CA66 on the relay panel toindicate that selection switch SW1 is to be set to B.(Described below.)
2 Cable J171 is not connected to the relay panel. Unplug thecable from connector CA62 of the detachable LCD/MDI unitin advance, or ensure that connector M51 is not exposeddirectly to any contaminant. (In an environment subject tostrong noise, cable J171 may function as an antenna andpick up that noise).
3 Provide a cover for the relay panel so as not to directlyexpose connectors CA66 and CPA to any contaminantswhen no cable is connected to these connectors.
4 After cable connection, the operation of selection switchSW1 is permitted.
5 When performing special operation at CNC power–up suchas a memory all clear operation with the detachableLCD/MDI unit, connect the detachable LCD/MDI unit to theCNC, and then turn on the CNC.
B–63393EN/02 5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
51
2 2
3
4
5
6
7
1 14
15
16
17
18
19
20
8
9
10
11
12
1316
20
15
17
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
RXD
*RXD
TXD
*TXD
11 0V
12 0V
13 RXTM1
14 RXTM2
TXTM1
TXTM2
18
19
CNC JD45(PCR-EV20MDT)
(VDR)
(HSYNC)
(VSYNC)
(VDG)
(VDG)
01
02RXD RXD
03
04
11
12
13
14
15
16
14
15
16
17
18
19
J176
(0V)
(0V)
(0V)
(0V)
(0V)
RXD
*RXD
TXD
*TXD
0V
0V
Leave unused pins and pins enclosed in parentheses () open.
CA66 on relay panel(MR–20RM)
JD45 CA66
*RXD *RXD
TXD TXD
*TXD *TXD
0V 0V
0V 0V
RXTM1
RXTM2
TXTM1
TXTM2
#28AWGTwisted pairs
#28AWG
Shield
Recommended cable: A66L–0001–0284#10P (#28AWG 10 pairs, common shield) <Hitachi Cable, Ltd., Oki Electric Cable Co., Ltd.>
Recommended connector for JD45: PCR–E20FS or PCR–E20FA, Housing: PCR–V20LA <Honda Tsushin Kogyo Co., Ltd.>
Recommended connector for CA66: MR–20RM (with no housing) <Honda Tsushin Kogyo Co., Ltd.>Maximum cable length: Cables J176 and J167 must not exceed 50 m in total.
NOTE1 The connector of this cable is secured on the relay panel of
the cabinet. On the relay panel, be careful not to expose theconnector pins and joint portions directly to any contaminantregardless of whether the cables of the detachableLCD/MDI unit are attached.
2 Do not change signal lines between twisted pairs.3 Be sure to connect RXTM1 (13) and RXTM2 (14), and
TXTM1 (15) and TXTM2 (16) of JD45, respectively.4 This cable cannot be directly attached and detached using
the CNC connector JD45 as the attachment of cable J167.
Details of cable J176
5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS B–63393EN/02
52
1 FG
2 VDR
3 VDG
4 VDB
14
15 0V
16
17
5
6
7
8
18
19
20
21
9 22 RXD
Detachable LCD/MDI unitCA61 (DBM–25S–0001)
10 23 *RXD
11 24
12 25
13
1
8
2
15
4
11
3
16
5
12
4
17
2
9
6
19
3
10
5
18
14
15
19
16
17
18
Shield
22
23
21
8
9
20
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
8
9
10
11
12
13
1 VDR
2 HSYNC
3 VSYNC
4 VDG
5 VDB
6
7
0V
0V
0V
0V
0V
RXD
*RXD
TXD
*TXD
0V
0V
CA66 on relay panel(MR–20RM)
VSYNC
HSYNC
TXD
*TXD
0V
0V
0V
0V
0V
0V
Leave unused pins open.
RXD RXD
CA66 CA61
*RXD *RXD
TXD TXD
*TXD *TXD
0V 0V
0V 0V
VDR
0V
VDG
0V
VDB
0V
HSYNC
0V
VSYNC
0V
VDR
0V
VDG
0V
VDB
0V
HSYNC
0V
VSYNC
0V
FG1
#25AWGShieldedtwisted pair
#28AWG
75coaxial cable
J167
Recommended cable: A66L–001–0450 (#25AWG shielded twisted pair2, 75 coaxial cable5, common shield)Standard outside diameter 11.4 mm (12 mm max.) <Hitachi Cable, Ltd.>
Recommended connector for CA66: MR–20LF (with housing) <Honda Tsushin Kogyo Co., Ltd.>
Recommended connector for CA61: D–SUB 25–pin (DBM–25P) <Japan Aviation Electronics Industry, Ltd.>A housing that matches the outside diameter of the cable being used is required. The DB–C4–J11–S2 is recommended. <Japan Aviation Electronics Industry, Ltd.>
Maximum cable length: Cables J166 and J167 must not exceed 50 m in total.
Details of cable J167
B–63393EN/02 5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
53
NOTE1 The connector of this cable is connected to the relay panel of the cabinet. Ensure that the joint
portion between the connector and relay panel is not exposed directly to any contaminants.2 Connector CA61 of the detachable LCD/MDI unit is not waterproof. Ensure that the connector
is not exposed directly to any contaminants.3 Do not change signal lines between twisted pairs, and do not change coaxial cable signals and
0–V lines between pairs, either.
1) For 100 VAC
100 VAC0.5 A50/60 Hz, singlephase
Relay terminal for 100 VACCPAContact grounding type withdouble poles15A, 125V
100A
100B
G
100A
100B
G
R
S
G
R
S
G G
J168
2) For 200 VAC
200A
200B
G
200A
200B
G
R
S
G
R
S
G G
J168200 VAC power supply 0.25 A50/60 Hz, single phase
Relay terminal for 200 VACCPAContact grounding type withdouble poles15A, 250V
NOTE1 The connector of this cable is connected to the relay panel of the cabinet. Ensure that the joint
portion between the connector and relay panel is not exposed directly to any contaminant.2 The relay connector of this cable is not necessarily located on the same relay panel as CA66.3 Use class D or higher grounding.
Details of cable J168
5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS B–63393EN/02
54
1) For 100 VAC
100BR
G
100AS
GG
S100BR
G
100AS
GG
S
CPA on relay panel(Contact grounding type withdouble poles, 15 A, 125 V)
Detachable LCD/MDI unit CA63 (JL04V–2E10SL–3PE–B)
J169
100A
100B
G
100A
100B
G
R
S
G
2) For 200 VAC
Detachable LCD/MDI unit CA63 (JL04V–2E10SL–3PE–B)
200B
R
G
200AS
GG
S200B
R
G
200AS
GGS
200A
200B
G
200A
200B
G
R
S
G
R
S
G
CPA on relay panel
(Contact grounding type,
double–pole, 15 A, 250 V)
J169
Recommended cable: A66L–0001–0411 #3X0.5 (#25AWG3)
Recommended connector for CPA:Attachment plug grounding type, double–pole, 15 A, 125 V <WF7004, manufactured by Matsushita Electric Works, Ltd.> (for 100 VAC)Attachment plug grounding type, double–pole, 15 A, 250 V <WF7013, manufactured by Matsushita Electric Works, Ltd.> (for 200 VAC)
Recommended connector for CA63:JL04V–6A10SL–3SE–EB, straight plug <Japan Aviation Electronics Industry, Ltd.>JL04V–1012CK(06), cable clamp <Japan Aviation Electronics Industry, Ltd.>
NOTE1 The connector of this cable is connected to the relay panel of the cabinet. Ensure that the joint
portion between the connector and relay panel is not exposed directly to any contaminant.2 Connector CA63 of the detachable LCD/MDI unit is not waterproof. Ensure that the connector
is not exposed directly to any contaminant.
Details of cable J169
B–63393EN/02 5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
55
*SW1
04 03 02 01
*CM3 *CM2
10 09 08 07 06 05
16 15 14 13 12 11
20 19 18 17
1
2 *CM0
3 *CM1
4 *SW6
5 *SW4
6 *SW2
7 *SW0
8 *CM2
9 *CM3
10 *SW7
11 *SW5
12 *SW3
13 *SW1
14
15 *CM5
16
17 *CM7
18 *CM4
19 *CM8
20
M51 CA62
6
8
13
17
1
3
11
16
20
7
12
14
182
4
15
19
7
65
4
2
8
18
16
19
1312
11
10
39
15
17
*SW0
Shield
M51 on relay panel(MR–20RF)
CA62 on detachable LCD/MDI unit
*CM6*CM1 *CM0
*SW2 *SW1 *SW0 FG
*SW5 *SW4 *SW3 *CM4*CM6 *CM5
*CM8 *CM7 *SW7 *SW6
*SW2
*SW4
*SW6
*CM0
*CM2
*CM4
*CM6
*CM8*SW1
*SW3
*SW5
*SW7
*CM1
*CM3
*CM5
*CM7
*SW0
*SW2
*SW4
*SW6
*CM0
*CM2
*CM4
*CM6
*CM8
*SW3
*SW5
*SW7
*CM1
*CM3
*CM5
*CM7
FG5
Leave unused pins open.
Recommended cable: A66L–0001–0284#10P (#28 AWG10 pairs, common shield) <Hitachi Cable, Ltd., Oki Electric Cable Co., Ltd.>
Recommended connector for M51: MR–20LF (with housing) <Honda Tsushin Kogyo Co., Ltd.>
Recommended connector for CA62: HR22–12TPD–20S (housing and contact) <Hirose Electric Co., Ltd.>Drawing number to be specified when this connector is purchased from FANUC A02B–0211–K382
Details of cable J171
5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS B–63393EN/02
56
NOTE1 The connector of this cable is connected to the relay panel
of the cabinet. Ensure that the joint portion between theconnector and relay panel is not exposed directly to anycontaminant.
2 Connector CA62 of the detachable LCD/MDI unit is notwaterproof. Ensure that the connector is not exposeddirectly to any contaminant.
3 In a system using the LCD unit described in the previoussection, this cable is required only when the MDI part isbeing used for maintenance.
1) A lower ambient temperature reduces the LCD brightness. (Inparticular, immediately after the power is turned on, the LCD screenwill be dark.) This is a characteristic of the LCD; it does not indicatea failure of the LCD. As the ambient temperature increases, the LCDscreen becomes brighter.
2) The cables of the detachable LCD/MDI unit are consumables.
The following cables are available from FANUC:
Cable No. Drawing No. Cablelength
Supplementarydescription
J167 A02B–0166–K901 1.5 mSerial/video signal cable of
A02B–0166–K902 5 m
Serial/video signal cable ofdetachable LCD/MDI
J169 A02B–0166–K905 1.5 m Detachable LCD/MDI
A02B–0166–K906 5 mpower supply cable forconnection to 200 VAC
J171 A02B–0166–K903 1.5 mMDI signal cable of
A02B–0166–K904 5 m
MDI signal cable ofdetachable LCD/MDI
1) A02B–0166–K905, K906Connector CPA is a 3–pin connector for 200 VAC. By attachingattachment A or B, listed below, to this cable, this cable can be attachedto a 3–pin connector for 100 VAC.
Attachment Drawing No. Length Supplementary description
Attachment A A02B–0166–K910 0.1 m
Attachment B A02B–0166–K911 1 m For 100–VAC connection
Supplementary
Cable list
B–63393EN/02 5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
57
DetachableLCD/MDI unit
Cable J169 Attachment A Attachment B
200 VACAttachment pluggrounding typeDouble poles,
15A, 250 V
100 VACAttachment pluggrounding typeDouble poles,
5A, 150 V
AMP Japan,3 pins
(200 VAC)
NOTEThe connector of the attachment is not waterproof. Ensurethat the connector is not directly exposed to anycontaminant. (Be careful not to allow attachment A or eitherend to touch the floor.)
When a relay panel is installed to connect the 18i–LNA and thisdetachable LCD/MDI, it is recommended that the following label beaffixed to the detachable LCD/MDI. This label indicates that switch SW1on the detachable LCD/MDI is to be set to B.
A02B–0166–K031(Label shown to the left50)
Label
5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS B–63393EN/02
58
An input/output device is used to enter information such as CNCprograms and parameters from an external device to the CNC, or to outputinformation from the CNC to an external device.
The interface of the input/output devices electrically conforms toRS–232–C, so that a connection can be made with a device that has anRS–232–C interface.
ER
+24V
14
1615
17
1918
20
2221
23
2524
SDFG
RD
CSRS
DRSGCD
1
32
4
65
7
98
10
1211
13
0VSD
ER
RS0V
0V
+24V
11
1312
14
1615
1817
1920
0VRD
DR
CS0V
0VCD0V
+24V
1
32
4
65
87
910
CNC
JD5A, JD5BPCR–V20MD
RELAY CONNECTOR(DBM–25S)
NOTE1 +24 V can be used as the power supply for FANUC
RS–232–C equipment.2 Do not connect anything to those pins for which signal
names are not indicated.
5.2CONNECTION WITHINPUT/OUTPUTDEVICES
5.2.1Overview
5.2.2RS–232–C Serial Port
B–63393EN/02 5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
59
1234567891011121314151617181920
3
6
5
8
2
20
47
251
RD
DR
CS
CD
SD
ER
RSSG
+24V
RD0VDR0VCS0VCD0V
+24VSD0VER0VRS0V
+24VFG
RECOMMENDED CABLE SPECIFICATIONA66L–0001–0284#10P (#28AWG10 pairs)RECOMMENDED CABLE–SIDE CONNECTORS (JD5A, JD5B)PCR–E20FA (Honda Tsushin Kogyo Co., Ltd.)FI30–20S (Hirose Electric Co., Ltd.)FCN–247J020–G/E (Fujitsu, Ltd.)52622–2011 (Molex Japan Co., Ltd.)
RECOMMENDED CABLE SPECIFICATION (PUNCH PANEL) forJD5A and JD5B<Narrow width type>A02B–0120–C191 (1 m)A02B–0120–C192 (2 m)A02B–0120–C193 (5 m)
CABLE CONNECTION
SHIELD
NOTEDo not connect anything to those pins for which signalnames are not indicated.
5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS B–63393EN/02
60
Generally signals as follows are used in RS–232–C interface.
CNC
SD (Send data)
RD (Recieve data)
RS (Request to Send)
CS (Enable to send)
ER (Ready)
DR (Data set ready)
CD (Check data)
SG (Signal ground)
FG (Frame ground)
When CS is not usedshort CS and RS.
When DR is not used short DR and ER.
Always short ER and CD.
Output
Input
Fig. 5.2.3 (a) RS–232–C interface
5.2.3RS–232–C InterfaceSpecification
RS–232–C Interfacesignals
B–63393EN/02 5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
61
Signalname
RS–232Ccircuit number
I/O Description
SD 103 Output Sending data Start bit Stop bit
RD 104 Input Receiving
data
ONOFF
4
(When ISO code “0” is sent)
1 2 3 85 6 7
RS 105 Input Sending request
This signal is set to on when NC startssending data and is turned off whentransmission ends.
CS 106 Input Sending permitted
When both this signal and the DRsignal are set, the NC can send data. Ifexternal device processing is delayedby a punching operation, etc., NC datasending can be stopped by turning offthis signal after sending twocharacters, including the data beingsent currently. If this signal will not beused, make sure to strap this signalcircuit to the RS signal circuit.
DR 107 Input Data set ready
When external device is ready tooperate, this signal is set. This signalshould usually be connected to thesignal indicating external device powersupply being on. (ER signal of externaldevice). See Note below.The NC transfers data when this signalis set. If the signals turned off duringdata transfer, alarm 086 is issued. If theDR signal will not be used, make sureto strap this signal circuit to the ERsignal circuit.
ER 108.2 Output NC readyto operation
This signal is set when the NC is readyto operate. External device shouldregard the SD signal as beingsignificant when the ER signal is set.
CD 109 Input Signal qualitysignal
Since this signal is not used inconnections with external device, thesignal circuit must be strapped, insidethe connecting cable, to the ER signalcircuit.
SG 102 Signal grounding
FG 101 Frame grounding
Signal Condition Marking Spacing
OFF ON
NOTESignal on/off state is defined as follows;
–3V or lower +3V or higher
Function
Signal description of RS–232–C interface
5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS B–63393EN/02
62
Generally, two transmission methods are available at the serial interface.Series 18i–LNA use the start–stop method. With this method, start andstop signals are output before and after each data bit.
One character in start–stop
b1 b2 b3 b4 b5 b6 b7 b8
Start bit
Data bit (8 bit including one parity bit)
Stop bits(2 bits)
Transmission codes are as follows:
(i) EIA code and Control codes DC1 to DC4.
(ii)ISO code and Control codes DC1 to DC4 (Optional ISO code input isnecessary.)
The connected external device must be able to recognize the followingcontrol codes, sent from NC.
Control code 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
DC1 Tape reader start
DC2 Tape punch designation
DC3 Tape reader stop
DC4 Tape punch release
NOTEThe listed control codes are used for both EIA and ISO.
In this interface, control codes DC1 to DC4 are used.
(a) NC can control external device by issuing codes DC1 to DC4.
(b)When external processing falls behind the pace of the NC signals(When NC issues data)
(i) External device can temporarily stop NC data output by using theNC’s CS signal. Data output stops within two characters includinga currently transmitting character when CS OFF signal is input toNC. When CS signal is turned on again, data transmission start.
(ii)If control code DC3 is input to NC, NC stops data output within tencharacters. When control code DC1 is input to NC, NC startssending data again.
(c) When the external device is equipped with an ISO/EIA converter, theexternal device must satisfy the specification shown in Table 5.2.3 (a).
Transmission Method ofRS–232–C interface
Start–stop
Codes
B–63393EN/02 5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
63
Table 5.2.3ISO code EIA code
Character 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Character 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1Meaning
0 0 Numeral 0
1 1 Numeral 1
2 2 Numeral 2
3 3 Numeral 3
4 4 Numeral 4
5 5 Numeral 5
6 6 Numeral 6
7 7 Numeral 7
8 8 Numeral 8
9 9 Numeral 9
A a Address A
B b ? Address B
C c Address C
D d ? Address D
E e ? Address E
F f Address F
G g Address G
H h Address H
I i Address I
J j ? Address J
K k Address K
L l ? Address L
M m Address M
N n Address N
O o
Not used at significant data zone in ISOcode.Assumed as address 0 at EIA code.
P p Address P
Q q Address Q
R r Address R
S s Address S
T t Address T
U u Address U
V v ? Address V
W w Address W
X x Address X
Y y ? Address Y
Z z Address Z
DEL Del Delete (cancel erroneous hole)
NUL Blank No holes. Not used at significant datazone is EIA code.
BS BS Back space
HT Tab Tabulator
LF or NL CR or EOB End of block
CR Carriage return
SP SP Space
% ER Absolute rewind stop
( ( 2–4–5 ) Control out (start of comment)
) ( 2–4–7 ) Control in (end of comment)
+ + Plus sign
– – Minus sign
: Assumed as program number in ISO code.
/ / Optional block skip
. . Decimal point
# Sharp
$ Dollar symbol
& & Ampersand
’ Apostrophe
Asterisk
, , Comma
; Semicolon
< Left angle bracket
= Equal mark
> Right angle bracket
? Question mark
@ Commerical at mark
” Quotation mark
5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS B–63393EN/02
64
NOTE1 When the external device is equipped with an ISO/EIA
converter, the following items must be noted in Table 5.3.4(a).
ISO code (.......................)
EIA code (.......................)
Control out (Comment field start)
CR
LF
Control in (Comment field end)
Condition1 Condition1
Condition1
Left parenthesis “(”of the ISO code punches holes at bits 2, 4 and 5 when used in the EIA code.Right parenthesis “)”of the ISO code punches holes at bits 2, 4 and 7 when used in the EIA code.
Condition2
EIA code is in ISO code.
Condition3
EIA code O is : in ISO code.
Condition2 Condition3
CR LF
o ....................
: ....................
2 Control codes DC1 to DC4 are transmission codes outputfrom the NC. So they need not to be punched on the NCtape.
(iii) Transmission rate (Baud rate)The transmission rate (Baud rate) is the number of bits transferred persecond.The following baud rates are available depending on the systemparameter.
50, 100, 110, 150, 200, 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600.
(Example)Baud rate : 110
When using one start bit and two stop bits (totalling 11 bitsper character):
Transmission characters/second= 110
11=10 characters/second
(Max.)
(iv) Cable lengthThe cable length depends on the connected device type. Consult withthe device manufacturers for actual connecting cable lengths.
B–63393EN/02 5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
65
(1)NC outputs DC1.
(2)The external device starts sending data upon receiving DC1.
(3)NC sends DC3 when NC processing is delayed.
(4)The external device stops sending data to NC after receiving DC3.The device may send up to 10 characters after receiving DC3. If itsends more than 10 characters, alarm 087 will occur.
(5)NC reissues DC1 upon completing delayed processing.
(6)The external device restarts data output upon receiving the DC1 code(the data must be the next data to the preceding.)
(7)NC sends DC3 upon completing data read.
(8)The external device stops sending data.
10ms or longer 100ms or longer
DC3
ER code
DC1 CD3 DC1
1ms or longer
Up to 10 characters
ER(Output)
RS(Output)
SD(Output)
RD(Input)
DR(Input)
CS(Input)
Time chart when the NCreceives data (Read into memory)
5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS B–63393EN/02
66
(1)NC output DC2.
(2)NC outputs punch data in succession.
(3)When data processing is delayed at the external device.
(a) Data output stops within two characters including a currentlytransmitting character when CS signal is turned off.When CS signal is turned on again, data transmission starts. (See Fig.5.2.3 (b))
(b) If control code DC3 is input to NC, NC stops data output within tencharacters. When control code DC1 is input to NC, NC starts sendingdata again. (See Fig. 5.2.3 (c))
(4)The NC starts sending the next data if the CS signal is turned on afterthe external device completes data processing.
(5)The NC issues DC4 upon completing data output.
10ms or longer 100ms or longer
DC4DC2
1ms or longer Within 2 characters
ER(Output)
RS(Output)
SD(Output)
RD(Input)
CS(Input)
Fig. 5.2.3 (b)
1ms or longer
10ms or longer 100ms or longer
DC4DC2
ER(Output)
RS(Output)
SD(Output)
Within 10 characters
RD(Input)
DR(Input)
CS(Input)
DC1DC3
Fig. 5.2.3 (c)
Time chart when the NCsend data (Punch out)
B–63393EN/02 5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
67
CNC I/O device sideSD
RD
RS
CS
ER
DR
CD
SG
FG
SD
RD
RS
CS
ER
DR
CD
SG
FG
Connection betweenRS–232–C interface andexternal device
5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS B–63393EN/02
68
When the ER and DR signals are not used for handshaking, connectthe cable as shown below.
CNC I/O device sideSD
RD
RS
CS
ER
DR
CD
SG
FG
SD
RD
RS
CS
ER
DR
CD
SG
FG
Prepare the cable with I/O device as follows :
DR
Serial interface
Cable : twist 10 pairs 0.18mm2, with shield
SD
RD
RSCS
SG
ER
B–63393EN/02 6. SPINDLE CONNECTION
69
6 SPINDLE CONNECTION
The figure below shows the spindle–related connections.
JA41
JA41
Main CPUboard
Sub–CPUboard
JA7B
JA7A
SPM
TB2
SPM
TB2
SPM
TB2
SPM
TB2
JA7B
JA7A
JA7B
JA7A
JA7B
JA7A
Positioncoder
Positioncoder
Positioncoder
Positioncoder
Spindlemotor
Spindlemotor
Spindlemotor
Spindlemotor
The above shows an example of the maximum configuration. Anynumber of spindle motors can be used within the range of the aboveconfiguration. For example, a system using only the main CPU boardmay use just one spindle, or a system with the main CPU and sub–CPUboards may use one spindle for each board.
NOTEFor connection between a spindle amplifier and spindlemotor and connection between a spindle amplifier anddetector, refer to the relevant manual for the SPINDLEMOTOR α series.
6. SPINDLE CONNECTION B–63393EN/02
70
11
1312
14
1615
1817
1920
14SOUT
11
1312
1615
1817
1920
*SIN
JA7B(PCR–E20MDT)
0V
0V
0V
SIN
*SOUT
1
32
4
65
87
910
CNC
JA41 (main board,sub–CPU board)PCR–E20MDK–SL–A(PCR–EV20MDT)
SPM (Spindle amplifier module)
0V0V
0V
0V0V
0V
*SINSIN
*SOUT
1
32
4
65
87
910
SOUT
(+5V)(+5V)
(+5V)(+5V)
(+5V)
(+5V)
CAUTIONThe +5V pin is used for optical link transmission using anoptical I/O link adapter. When a metallic cable such as thiscable is used for connection, make no connection to the +5Vpins. If a connection is made to the +5V pins by mistake, ashort–circuit can occur between the +5V pins of the CNCand spindle module, and can damage the unit.
NOTE1 The second serial spindle is connected as a branch from the
spindle amplifier module.2 Leave open the pins for which no signal name is indicated.
6.1SERIAL SPINDLE
6.1.1Connection of One toTwo Serial Spindles
B–63393EN/02 6. SPINDLE CONNECTION
71
1 3
4
12,14,16
1
Connector JA7B
SIN
*SIN
SOUT
*SOUT
0V
Connector JA41
SOUT
*SOUT
SIN
*SIN
0V
Cable connection
CNCSpindleamplifiermodule
3
4
2
12,14,16
2
Ground plate Ground plate
Recommended cable connector:PCR–E20FA (manufactured by Honda Tsushin Kogyo)FI30–20S (manufactured by Hirose Electric)FCN–247J020–G/E (manufactured by Fujitsu)52622–2011 (manufactured by Molex Japan)
Recommended wire specification: A66L–0001–0284#10P (#28AWG × 10 pairs)
NOTEIn any of the following cases, make a connection via anoptical fiber cable by using an optical I/O link adapter: When the cable is 20 m or longer When the cable is subject to significant noise. For
example, when there is a strong electromagnetic noisesource such as a welding machine near the cable, orwhen the cable runs in parallel with a power line or powermagnetics cable that can generate noise.
When an optical I/O link adapter is used, see Subsection8.2.2.
7. SERVO INTERFACE B–63393EN/02
72
7 SERVO INTERFACE
B–63393EN/02 7. SERVO INTERFACE
73
This chapter describes how to connect the servo units to the control unit.For details of the connection of the Servo amplifier α Series Descriptions(B–65162E), refer to the relevant manual.
COP10A
COP10B
COP10A
COP10B
COP10A
COP10B
COP10A
COP10B
COP10A
Control unit
Servo amplifier modules
Optical fiber cable
Main: Maximum 6 axesSub: Maximum 4 axes
The connection between the CNC control unit and the servo amplifiersshould use only one optical fiber cable, regardless of the number ofcontrolled axes. See APPENDIX D for details on the optical fiber cable.
In the control unit, the COP10A connector is placed on the servo cardinstalled on the main CPU board. When a sub–CPU board is used,COP10A is placed on the servo card installed on the sub–CPU board aswell.
7.1SERVO INTERFACE
7.1.1General
7.1.2Interface to the ServoAmplifiers
7. SERVO INTERFACE B–63393EN/02
74
So, to connect the servo check board or interface board for automaticadjustment with the control unit, a servo check adapter and special cableare required. (The ordering information for the servo check adapter andcable is A02B–0236–K822.)
Examples of connection
When the servo check board is used
Connect TEST0–3 with CN2 of the servo check board via the flat cable.
CA54
CNC
CN0
TESTn
CN2
Servo check adapter Servo check board
When the interface board for automatic adjustment is used
A) Connect TEST0–3 with CIN1/2 of the interface board for automaticadjustment via a flat cable.
CA54
CNC
CN0
TESTn
CIN1
Interface board for automatic adjustment
CIN2
Servo check adapter
B) Connect TESTA/B with CIN3 of the interface board for automaticadjustment via a straight cable (such as A660–2042–T007#*****).
CA54
CNC
CN0
TESTx
CIN3
Interface board for automatic adjustment
Servo check adapter
NOTEIn any case, use the special cable (A660–2042–T154) toconnect CN0 with CA54 on the mother board of the CNC.
7.1.3Connecting the ServoCheck Adapter
B–63393EN/02 7. SERVO INTERFACE
75
Axis signal output
TEST0 1/2
TEST1 3/4
TEST2 5/6
TEST3 7/8
TESTA 1/2/3/4
TESTB 5/6/7/8
Connector ConnectorControlled axisnumber(*1)
Controlled axisnumber(*1)
(*1) The correspondence between the controlled axis numbers and servoaxis numbers depends on the setting of parameter No. 1023.
Connector locations
TESTATESTB
TEST3
TEST2 TEST0
CN0
TEST1
Servo check adapter for the Series 18i–LNAA20B–1007–0240
NC side
Axis 5/6
Axis 7/8
Axes 5 to 8
Axis 1/2
Axis 3/4
Axes 1 to 4
Pin diagram
1
2
GND
CLKX0
3
4
GND
FSX0
5
6
DX2
DX0
7
8
CLKX2
FSX2
CN0
9
10
CLKX3
FSX3
11
12
GND
CLKX1
13
14
GND
FSX1
15
16
DX3
DX1
17
18
–15V
+5V
19
20
+15V
+5V
A1
A2
+5V
CLKXn
A3
A4
FSXn
DXn
A5
A6
A7
A8
TEST0–3
GND
GND
GND
GND
+5V
+15V
–15V
GND
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
1
2
GND
CLKX0/2
3
4
GND
FSX0/2
5
6
GND
DX0/2
7
8
TESTA/TESTB
9
10
11
12
GND
CLKX1/3
13
14
GND
FSX1/3
15
16
GND
DX1/3
17
18
–15V
+5V
19
20
+15V
+5V
8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63393EN/02
76
8 CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
B–63393EN/02 8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
77
The FANUC I/O Link is a serial interface which connects the CNC, andI/O devices and transfers I/O signals (bit data) at high speeds betweeneach device. The FANUC I/O Link regards one device as the master andother devices as slaves when more than one device is connected. Inputsignals from the slaves are sent to the master at specified intervals. Outputsignals from the master are also sent to the slaves at specified intervals.
8.1GENERAL
8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63393EN/02
78
Interface connector JD1A for I/O Link is provided on the main CPUboard.In the I/O there are the master station and its slave stations. The masteris the control unit of the CNC, and the slave is the other I/O devices. Theslaves are divided into groups, and up to 16 groups can be connected toone I/O Link.The I/O Link is connected in different ways depending on the types ofunits actually used and the I/O points. To connect the I/O Link, theassignment and addresses of the I/O signals have been madeprogrammable with the PMC program. The maximum number of I/Opoints is 1024.The two connectors of the I/O Link are named JD1A and JD1B, and arecommon to all units (that have I/O Link function). A cable is alwaysconnected from JD1A of a unit to JD1B of the next unit. Although JD1Aof the last unit is not used and left open, it need not be connected with aterminator.The pin assignments of connectors JD1A and JD1B are common to allunits on the I/O Link, and are illustrated on Subsec. 8.2.1. Use the figureswhen connecting the I/O Link irrespective of the type of unit.
……
Main CPUboardJD1A
I/O256/256 or less per group
I/O1024/1024 or less in total I/O LinkFANUC I/O Link
FANUC I/O Unit– MODEL A2max
I/O device
Control unit
Magneticcircuit
Max. 16 group
JD1B
JD1A
JD1B
JD1A
JD1B
JD1A
Fig. 8.2 I/O Link connection diagram
8.2CONNECTION
B–63393EN/02 8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
79
SIN1
3
SIN2
SOUT4
6
SOUT5
87
910
0V11
13
0V12
0V14
16
0V15
1817
1920
JD1A(PCR–E20MDK–SL–A)
JD1B(PCR–E20LMD)
JD1B
JD1A(PCR–E20LMD)
Next slaveunit
SIN1
3
SIN2
SOUT4
6
SOUT5
87
910
0V11
13
0V12
0V14
16
0V15
1817
1920
Control unit or preceding slave unit I/O unit MODEL A
(+5V)(+5V)
(+5V)(+5V)
(+5V)
(+5V)
Leave open the pins for which no signal name is indicated.The +5V pin is used for optical cable transmission using an optical I/Olink adapter.
CAUTIONWhen an optical I/O link adapter is not used, make noconnection to the +5V pins. If a connection is made to the+5V pins, a short–circuit can occur between the +5V pins,and can damage the unit.
Shield
SOUTSOUTSINSIN0V0V0V0V
SINSINSOUT
SOUT0V0V0V0V
123411121314
3412
11121314
Cable wirinr
Recommended wire materialA66L–0001–0284#10P(#28AWG10pair)
8.2.1Connection of FANUCI/O Link by ElectricCable
8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63393EN/02
80
NOTECross cable connections are made between the pins (1, 2)and the pins (3, 4).
Recommended cable connectorsPCR–E20FA (Honda Tsushin Kogyo Co., Ltd.)FI30–20S (Hirose Electric Co., Ltd.)FCN–247J020–G/E (Fujitsu Ltd.)52622–2011 (Molex Japan Co., Ltd.)
The FANUC I/O Link can be extended to the maximum length of 200 mwith optical fiber cables using an optical I/O link adapter.
NOTEIn the following cases, use an optical cable. When the cable is more than 10 meters long. When the cable runs between different cabinets and it is
impossible to connect the cabinets with a grounding wireof 5.5 mm2 or thicker.
When there is concern that the cable is influenced bystrong noise; for example :When there is a strong electromagnetic noise sourcebeside the cable such as a welding machine.When a noise generating cable such as a power cableruns for a long distance in parallel with the cable.
Optical connectorCOP1
connector JD1 forunit connecting
66.0
40.0
FANUC
4–M3
45.0
18.07.
0
Main body : Approx. 100 g.
8.2.2Connection of FANUCI/O Link Optical Cable
External dimension ofoptical I/O Link adapter
Weight of optical I/O Linkadapter
B–63393EN/02 8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
81
Unit
Connectingcable betweenunit
JD1A
Optical I/Olink adapter
Opticalcable
Unit
JD1B
COP1
JD1
COP1
JD1
Connectingcable betweenunitOptical I/O
link adapter
*SIN01
03
SIN02
SOUT04
06
*SOUT05
0807
09 +5V10
0V11
13
0V12
0V14
16
0V15
1817
+5V
+5V
1920
0V0V
SIN(01)*SIN(02)
SOUT(03)*SOUT(04)
+5V(09)+5V(18)+5V(20)
0V(11)0V(12)0V(13)0V(14)0V(15)0V(16)
(03)SOUT(04)*SOUT(01)SIN(02)*SIN(09)+5V(18)+5V(20)+5V(11)0V(12)0V(13)0V(14)0V(15)0V(16)0V
Unit sideJD1A,JD1B
Adapter sideJD1
Recommended connector for cable side :PCR–E20FA (made by HONDA TSUSIN KOGYO CO., LTD.)FI30–20S (made by HIROSE ELECTRIC CO., LTD.)FCN–247J020–G/E (made by FUJITSU CO., LTD.)52622–2011 (made by MOLEX)
Recommended wire material : A66L–0001–0284#10P (#28AWG 10 pair)
Cable length : Max. 2 m (when the recommended wire material isused)
NOTECross the cables for pins 1 and 2 as well as those for pins3 and 4.
Cables are available in various lengths. For the cables for external lines, also see Appendix D.
Cable length: Max. 200 m
Power voltage : 4.75V to 5.25V (at the receiving end)
Consumption current : 200mA
Connection
Connection diagram
Interunit connectingcables
Optical cable
Power source
8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63393EN/02
82
The optical I/O Link adapter enclosure is not fully sealed ; install itwith the 18i–LNA control unit in the fully enclosed cabinet.
Ground the case using the case fixing screw of the optical I/O Linkadapter.
The optical I/O Link adapter is light, and it may not be necessary tomount it with screws. However, keep it from coming in contact withother circuits to prevent possible short–circuits. When mounting theoptical I/O Link adapter in a cabinet, attach it with an L–type fittingusing the case fixing screws (M3) of the optical I/O Link adapter.
L fitting
For making up an I/O Link using the optical I/O link adapter, thefollowing parts are necessary:
Optical I/O Link adapter 2
Interunit connecting cable 2
Optical cable 1
Installation conditions
Required parts
B–63393EN/02 8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
83
The I/O units that can be connected to the Series 18i–LNA are listedbelow.
Units that can be connected to the Series 18i–LNA
Unit Description Reference
Connector panelI/O module
Distribution type I/O unit that handlesthe input/output signals required by thepower magnetics circuit; A connectorpanel for installing this connector panelI/O module is provided for the Series18i–LNA by FANUC.
Sec. 8.5
10.4″ LCD unit (with touch paneland operator’s panelI/O)
An I/O interface for connecting theoperator’s panel and a manual pulsegenerator interface are located on therear of the LCD unit.
Sec. 8.6
Operator’s panelI/O module
Used for connecting a manual pulsegenerator.
Sec. 8.7
I/O link–AS–iconverter
A converter for converting the I/O Linkto the AS–i interface
Sec.8.8
FUNUC I/O Unit –MODEL A
A modular I/O unit that can flexiblyhandle the input/output signals requiredby the power magnetics circuit.
Connection andMaintenanceManual(B–61813E)
8.3UNITS THAT CAN BECONNECTED USINGFANUC I/O Link
8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63393EN/02
84
In a system using the Series 18i–LNA, I/O connection is allowed in thefollowing three configurations:
1) For the PMCFor connection to the power magnetics cabinet and operator’s panel,I/O units manufactured by FANUC are used. Sequence control for themachine is performed through a PMC ladder. The machine toolbuilder is to create the PMC ladder.
2) For the PLC: Using the 10.4″ LCD unit (with touch panel andoperator’s panel I/O)For connection to the power magnetics cabinet, a PLC is used. Forconnection to the operator’s panel, an I/O unit manufactured byFANUC is used.Sequence control for the machine is performed through the PLC. Thesignals of the operator’s panel connected to the I/O unit are transferredto and from the PLC, and so they can be processed on the PLC.
3) For the PLC: Using a general display unitConnection to the power magnetics cabinet and operator’s panel, andsequence control of the machine are performed through the PLC. Thisconfiguration is the same as the ordinary configuration of the Series18–LNB.For connection to a manual pulse generator, an operator’s panel I/Omodule is used. This module is not used for other purposes.
1) For the PMC
Power magnetics box
1–slot control unit
Connector panel (connector panel I/O module)
Operation box
Power mangetics cabinet Operator’s panel
I/O Link I/O Link
Manual pulse generator
MainCPUboard
10.4″ LCD unit (withtouch panel and
operator’s panel I/O)
The operator’s panel I/O circuit connected to the operator’s panel andmanual pulse generator is located on the rear of the 10.4″ LCD unit.
If all I/O signals cannot be connected to five connector panels, anadditional connector panel can be used.
The signals directly used (output) by the CNC, such as the emergencystop and skip input signals and servo ready output signal are connectedto the connector panel.
8.4I/O CONNECTION OFTHE Series 18i–LNA
B–63393EN/02 8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
85
Instead of the connector panel, the FANUC I/O Unit–MODEL A canbe used.
I/O link assignment must be performed with a PMC ladder created bythe machine tool builder. The assignment must be performed asfollows:
When using a connector panel
X0
X6X7
X22X23
X38X39
X54X55
X63
X64
X79X80
X95X96
X111X112
X127
Input: X
Connector panel 116 bytes· Required
Connector panel 216 bytes· Additional
Connector panel 316 bytes· Additional
Reserved
Connector panel 416 bytes· Additional
Connector panel 516 bytes· Additional
Connector panel 616 bytes· Additional
10.4″ LCD unit (with a touch panel andoperator’s panel I/O)16 bytes· Required
Reserved
8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63393EN/02
86
Y0
Y6Y7
Y14
Y31
Y63
Y64
Y67
Y15
Y22Y23
Y30
Y68
Y75Y76
Y83Y84
Y91Y92
Y127
Reserved
Reserved
10.4″ LCD unit (with a touchpanel and operator’s panel I/O)4 bytes· Required
Connector panel 48 bytes· Additional
Connector panel 58 bytes· Additional
Connector panel 68 bytes· Additional
Connector panel 18 bytes· Additional
Connector panel 28 bytes· Additional
Connector panel 38 bytes· Additional
Output: Y
Reserved
NOTEAlways use connector panel 1. If the I/O points on the connector panel are not enough,connector panels 2 to 6 can be added.
NOTEThe 16th input byte of each module contains DO alarm detection signals. DO alarm detectionsignals X22, X38, and X79 are monitored by the CNC. When these signals detect a DO alarm,the CNC issues an alarm. Since the other signals X54, X95, X111, and X127 are not handledby the CNC, the machine tool builder should create a PMC ladder to monitor these signals andindicate an alarm if these signals detect a DO alarm.
B–63393EN/02 8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
87
NOTEWhen using the FANUC I/O Link–AS–i converter, allocate input X96 to X127 (32 bytes) andoutput Y96 to Y127 (32 bytes) to the converter.
When using the FANUC I/O Unit–MODEL A
Input: X
0
6364
79
127
I/O Unit–MODEL A(Can be allocated freely.)
Y0
Y63Y64
Y67
Y127
Y68
80
10.4″ LCD unit (with a touch paneland operator’s panel I/O)16 bytes· Required
10.4″ LCD unit (with a touch paneland operator’s panel I/O)4 bytes· Required
Output: Y
I/O Unit–MODEL A(Can be allocated freely.)
I/O Unit–MODEL A(Can be allocated freely.)
I/O Unit–MODEL A(Can be allocated freely.)
NOTEWhen using the FANUC I/O Unit–MODEL A, set bits 0 to 2 of CNC parameter No. 17901 to 1.
8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63393EN/02
88
NOTEWhen using the FANUC I/O Link–AS–i converter, allocate input X96 to X127 (32 bytes) andoutput Y96 to Y127 (32 bytes) to the converter.
The signals directly used by the CNC are assigned as shown below.
Input signals
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
X7Skip signal
Parameterwrite
protection
Skipsignal#2
Parameterwrite
protection#2
SKIP PWES SKIP#2 PWES#2
X8
Emergencystop#2
EmergencystopX8
*ESP#2 *ESP
X9
B–axisclamp
finished
B–axisunclampfinished
Fourth axisservo–off
Fourth axisinterlock
Spindle out-put status 2
Spindle out-put status 1
ECLPB EUCLPB SVF4 *IT4 RCHHGA RCHA
X10
Skip 8signal
Skip 7signal
Skip 6signal
Skip 5signal
Skip 4signal
Skip 3signal
Skip 2signal
Skip 1signalX10
SKIP8 SKIP7 SKIP6 SKIP5 SKIP4 SKIP3 SKIP2 SKIP1
X11
Skip 8signal(SUB)
Skip 7signal(SUB)
Skip 6signal(SUB)
Skip 5signal(SUB)
Skip 4signal(SUB)
Skip 3signal(SUB)
Skip 2signal(SUB)
Skip 1signal(SUB)
X11
SKIP82 SKIP71 SKIP61 SKIP52 SKIP42 SKIP32 SKIP22 SKIP12
Output signals
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Y7
Spindlestop
detected
PMCoperating
B–axisclamp
command
B–axis
unclamp
command
CNC
Screen
Display End
Spindleoutput
changeovercommand
Servoready#2 Servo ready
SPSTDT PMCRUN CLPB UCLPB CNCSED RCHPA SA#2 SA
NOTEFor details on the signals, refer to the Connection Manual(Function) (B–63393EN–1).
B–63393EN/02 8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
89
The signals connected to the 10.4″ LCD unit (with touch paneloperator’s panel I/O) are defined as follows:
Input signals
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
X64Individual Continuous Reserved 2 Reserved 1
Continuouscut
Start/resetand start
Return ExecutionX64
SSW2 SSW1 PB4 PB3 PB2 PB1
X65
Axisselection6th axis
Axisselection5th axis
Reserved 8 Reserved 7 Reserved 6 Reserved 5 Reserved 4 Reserved 3
H6 H5
X66
Axisselection1/2 path
Magnification100
Magnification10
Magnification1
Axisselection
B
Axisselection
Z
Axisselection
Y
Axisselection
X
SEL2 100 10 1 HB HZ HY HX
Output signals
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Y64
Returnenable
Start/resetand start
Total failure Door openFull of
workpiecesNo
workpieceOperation in
progressReserved 1
Y64
PL8 PL7 PL6 PL5 PL4 PL3 PL2
Reserved 8 Reserved 7 Reserved 6 Reserved 5 Reserved 4 Reserved 3 Reserved 2 Reserved 9Y65
PL9
NOTEThese signals are not handled by the CNC. The machinetool builder must create a PMC ladder to process thesesignals and perform signal transfer to and from the CNC viathe M–NET interface.For the M–NET interface, refer to“Connection Manual (Function).”
8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63393EN/02
90
2) For the PLC: Using the 10.4″ LCD unit (with touch panel andoperator’s panel I/O)
Operation box
Power magnetics cabinet
I/O Link
Operator’s panel
Manual pulse generator
10.4″ LCD unit (withtouch panel and
operator’s panel I/O)
Power magnetics box
3–slot control unit
MainCPUboard
PLC in-terfaceboard
PLC
Emergencystop, skip,etc.
ExpansionI/O on PLC
The operator’s panel I/O circuit that is connected to the operator’spanel and manual pulse generator is located on the rear of the LCDunit.
I/O link assignment is factory set by FANUC. So, the machine toolbuilder need not perform the assignment.
The operator’s panel I/O signals are transferred to and from the PLC.For details, refer to the Connection Manual (Function)(B–63393EN–1).
The signals used directly by the CNC including the emergency stop,skip, and servo ready signals are connected to the I/O connector on thePLC interface board. In this case, the signals are assigned as shownbelow.
B–63393EN/02 8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
91
Input signals
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
X1004Skip signal
Parameterwrite
protection
Skipsignal#2
Parameterwrite
protection#2
SKIP PWES SKIP#2 PWES#2
X1008
Emergencystop#2
Emergencystop
X1008
*ESP#2 *ESP
X1034
B–axisclamp
complete
B–axisunclampcomplete
4th–axisservo off
4th–axisinterlock
Spindleoutput state
1
Spindleoutput state
2
ECLPB EUCLPB SVF4 *IT4 RCHHGA RCHA
Output signals
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Y1034
Spindlestop
detection
B–axisclamp
command
B–axisunclamp
command
Spindleoutputchange
command
Servoready#2 Servo ready
SPSTDT CLPB UCLPB RCHPA SA#2 SA
8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63393EN/02
92
3) For the PLC: Using a general display unit
Power magnetics cabinet
I/O Link
Operator’s panel
Manual pulse generator
Generaldisplay unit
Operation boxPower magnetics box
MainCPUboard
PLC in-terfaceboard
3–slot control unit
Operator’s panel I/O module
PLC ExpansionI/O on PLC
Emergencystop, skip,etc.
I/O link assignment is factory set by FANUC. So, the machine toolbuilder need not perform the assignment.
The operator’s panel I/O module is used for connection to the manualpulse generator.
The signals used directly by the CNC including the emergency stop,skip, and servo ready signals are connected to the I/O connector on thePLC interface board. The signals are assigned in the same way as in(2).
B–63393EN/02 8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
93
A special connector panel is provided for connection of the I/O signals inthe power magnetics cabinet of a system using the Series 18i–LNA.On this connector panel, connector panel I/O modules are mountedaccording to the number of required I/O signals and the output current.Up to 70 input signals and up to 48 output signals can be connected to theconnector panel.If all the I/O signals cannot be connected to five connector panels, anadditional connector panel can be used.The connector panel is connected to the CNC via the I/O Link.
The connector panel I/O modules that can be mounted on the connectorpanel are as follows:
Terminal block XT1· Power supply
connection· I/O signal connection
Connector panel I/Omodules
Bas
ic m
odul
e
Exp
ansi
on m
odul
e 1
Exp
ansi
on m
odul
e 2
Connectors CE62, CE63, CE64· I/O signal connection
8.5CONNECTION OFTHE CONNECTORPANEL
8.5.1Overview
8.5.2Connector Panel I/OModules Used
8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63393EN/02
94
Connector panel I/O module specifications
Name Drawing No. Function
Basic module A03B–0815–C001 · I/O Link interface· 24 input signals and 16 output
signals· Required· Installed in the basic module
position indicated in the figure.
Expansion module B A03B–0815–C003 · 24 input signals, 16 outputsignals
· Used as needed.· Installed in the position of
expansion module 1 or 2,indicated in the figure.
· When this module is installed inthe position of expansionmodule 1, 22 input signals areconnected to this module.
Expansion module C A03B–0815–C004 · 16 2A output signals· Used as needed.· Installed in the position of
expansion module 1, indicatedin the above figure.
NOTEFor each connector panel, one basic module is required. Anexpansion module is selectable.
Spare parts
Name Drawing No. Function
Fuse A03B–0815–K002 Used for the basic module.
Flat cable A03B–0815–K100 · Used for module connection.· As many as the number of
expansion modules arerequired.
B–63393EN/02 8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
95
(1)Use this I/O module in a completely sealed cabinet.
(2)For ventilation within each I/O module, each module must be installedin the orientation shown below. Moreover, for ventilation and wiring,allow a clearance of 100 mm or more above and below each module.Never place a device that generates a large amount of heat below anI/O module.
Upper side
Lower sideI/O Linkconnection
Exp
ansi
onm
odul
e
Exp
ansi
onm
odul
e 1
Exp
ansi
onm
odul
e 2
(3)The environment condition is the same as for the control unit. SeeSubsection 3.1.1.
Module Power supplyvoltage
Power supplyrating Remarks
Basic module 24 VDC (10% is fedthrough the powersupply terminal on
0.2A7.3mADI DI = number of DIsignals currentlyon
Expansionmodule B
the connector panel;(10% includesmomentaryvariations and
0.2A7.3mADI DI = number of DIsignals currentlyon
Expansionmodule C (2A module)
ripples. Use aregulated powersupply.
0.1A
As a guideline for the heat dissipation, assume [power supply rating24(W)].
Installation conditions
Power supply rating
8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63393EN/02
96
CNC
I/O Link
JD1A
CB150A CE62
CB150B CE63
CB150C CE64
XT1
CA52
CB150
JD1B
JD1A
CA52
CB150CA53
To connector board 2 ornext unit
Connector board 1
Basic module
Expansion module 1 (2A output module (NOTE))
Expansion module 2
CA52
CB150
CA53
Machine sideDI/DO
+24 V power supply
Machine side DI/DOand relay terminal
NOTEWhenever using the 2A module, always connect the moduleto CB150B on the connector panel.
8.5.3Connection Diagram
B–63393EN/02 8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
97
To terminal block XT1, feed a necessary power supply for operating theconnector panel modules and a power supply for input signals, as shownbelow. Also, feed a power supply for the output signals considering thatthe rated current per pin on terminal block XT1 is 8A.
Connector panel24–V power supply (for module operation and input signals)
XT1(14)
XT1(34),(35),(36),(37)
XT1(16)
XT1(15)
XT1(10)
+24V
0V
*
DOCOM
DOCOM2
XT1(17)DOCOM3
24–V power supply(for basic module output signals)
24–V power supply(for output signals of expansion module 1)
24–V power supply(for output signals of expansion module 2)
+24V
0V
+24V
0V
+24V
0V
+24V
0V
0V
0V
0V
NOTETo XT1 (10) indicated by *, connect 24 V (power supplyfor module operation and for input signals) when expansionmodule B is used; when expansion module C (2A outputmodule) is used, connect DOCOM2 (power supply foroutput signals).
8.5.4Power SupplyConnection
8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63393EN/02
98
Pins 1, 2, 3, and 4 on terminal block XT1 are not wired inside theconnection panel and are used to relay signals.
The following shows an example of connecting the relay pins.
XT1(1)
XT1(2)
XT1(3)
XT1(4)
Operator’s panel
Push–button switch
Emergency stop switch
Connector panel
Power magneticscabinet
8.5.5Connection Example ofRelay Pins
B–63393EN/02 8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
99
Perform I/O Link assignment for this connector panel (connector panelI/O modules) as follows:
Input signalsFirst connector panel:
X7 to X22 (16 bytes)Second connector panel:
X23 to X38 (16 bytes)Third connector panel:
X39 to X54 (16 bytes)Fourth connector panel:
X80 to X95 (16 bytes)Fifth connector panel:
X96 to X111 (16 bytes)Sixth connector panel:
X112 to X127 (16 bytes)
Output signalsFirst connector panel:
Y7 to Y14 (8 bytes)Second connector panel:
Y15 to Y22 (8 bytes)Third connector panel:
Y23 to Y30 (8 bytes)Fourth connector panel:
Y68 to Y75 (8 bytes)Fifth connector panel:
Y76 to Y83 (8 bytes)Sixth connector panel:
Y84 to Y91 (8 bytes)
X7 Basic module Y7 Basic module
X8 Y8
X9 Y9 Expansion module 1
X10 Expansion module 1 Y10
X11 NOTE 2) Y11 Expansion module 2
X12 NOTE 3) Y12
X13 Expansion module 2 Y13 Unused
X14 Y14
X15
X16 Unused
X17
X18
X19
X20
X21
X22 Output signal errordetection
NOTE1 The above table shows the addresses for the first connector
panel.2 X10.7 and X12.7 cannot be used. For the second and
subsequent connector panels, addresses are assigned in thesame way.
3 When the 2A output module (expansion module C) is used asexpansion module 1, X10 to X12 cannot be used. For thesecond and subsequent connector panels, addresses areassigned in the same way.
Assignment module namesInput signal : CM16IOutput signal : CM08O
8.5.6I/O Link Assignment
8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63393EN/02
100
The signals directly used by the CNC are defined as listed below.These signals must all be connected to the first connector panel.
Input signals
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
X7Skip signal
Parameterwrite
protection
Skipsignal#2
Parameterwrite
protection#2
SKIP PWES SKIP#2 PWES#2
X8
Emergencystop#2
EmergencystopX8
*ESP#2 *ESP
X9
B–axisclamp
finished
B–axis un-clamp
finished
Fourth axisservo–off
Fourth axisinterlock
Spindle out-put status 2
Spindle out-put status 1
ECLPB EUCLPB SVF4 *IT4 RCHHGA RCHA
X10
Skip 8signal
Skip 7signal
Skip 6signal
Skip 5signal
Skip 4signal
Skip 3signal
Skip 2signal
Skip 1signalX10
SKIP8 SKIP7 SKIP6 SKIP5 SKIP4 SKIP3 SKIP2 SKIP1
X11
Skip 8signal(SUB)
Skip 7signal(SUB)
Skip 6signal(SUB)
Skip 5signal(SUB)
Skip 4signal(SUB)
Skip 3signal(SUB)
Skip 2signal(SUB)
Skip 1signal(SUB)
X11
SKIP82 SKIP71 SKIP61 SKIP52 SKIP42 SKIP32 SKIP22 SKIP12
Output signals
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Y7
Spindlestop
detected
PMCoperating
B–axisclamp
command
B–axis
unclamp
command
CNC
Screen
Display End
Spindleoutput
changeovercommand
Servoready#2 Servo ready
SPSTDT PMCRUN CLPB UCLPB CNCSED RCHPA SA#2 SA
NOTEFor details on the signals, refer to the Connection Manual(Function).
B–63393EN/02 8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
101
33
34 Y9.0
35 Y9.1
36 Y9.2
37 Y9.3
38 Y9.4
39 Y9.5
40 Y9.6
41 Y9.7
42 X10.0
43 X10.1
44 X10.2
45 X10.3
46 X10.4
47 X10.5
48 X10.6
49
50
33
34 Y7.0
35 Y7.1
36 Y7.2
37 Y7.3
38 Y7.4
39 Y7.5
40 Y7.6
41 Y7.7
42 X7.0
43 X7.1
44 X7.2
45 X7.3
46 X7.4
47 X7.5
48 X7.6
49 X7.7
50
CE62 (MR–50RM: Manufactured by Honda Tsushin Kogyo Co., Ltd.)
19
20
21
22
23
24 DICOM1
25 X8.0
26 X8.1
27 X8.2
28 X8.3
29 X8.4
30 X8.5
31 X8.6
32 X8.7
01
02 Y8.0
03 Y8.1
04 Y8.2
05 Y8.3
06 Y8.4
07 Y8.5
08 Y8.6
09 Y8.7
10 X9.0
11 X9.1
12 X9.2
13 X9.3
14 X9.4
15 X9.5
16 X9.6
17 X9.7
18
CE63 (MR–50RM: Manufactured by Honda Tsushin Kogyo Co., Ltd.)
01
02 Y10.0
03 Y10.1
04 Y10.2
05 Y10.3
06 Y10.4
07 Y10.5
08 Y10.6
09 Y10.7
10 X12.0
11 X12.1
12 X12.2
13 X12.3
14 X12.4
15 X12.5
16 X12.6
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24 DICOM2
25 X11.0
26 X11.1
27 X11.2
28 X11.3
29 X11.4
30 X11.5
31 X11.6
32 X11.7
NOTE1 The above table shows the addresses for the first connector panel.2 The signals indicated by shading are also output to terminal block XT1. Whenever using the 2A
output module, always connect addresses Y9.0 to Y9.7 and Y10.0 to Y10.7 to terminal block XT1.For the second and subsequent connector panels, addresses are assigned in the same way.
8.5.7Signal Connections
8.5.7.1Pin assignment
8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63393EN/02
102
01
02 Y12.0
03 Y12.1
04 Y12.2
05 Y12.3
06 Y12.4
07 Y12.5
08 Y12.6
09 Y12.7
10 X15.0
11 X15.1
12 X15.2
13 X15.3
14 X15.4
15 X15.5
16 X15.6
17 X15.7
18
33
34 Y11.0
35 Y11.1
36 Y11.2
37 Y11.3
38 Y11.4
39 Y11.5
40 Y11.6
41 Y11.7
42 X13.0
43 X13.1
44 X13.2
45 X13.3
46 X13.4
47 X13.5
48 X13.6
49 X13.7
50
CE64 (MR–50RM: Manufactured by Honda Tsushin Kogyo Co., Ltd.)
19
20
21
22
23
24 DICOM3
25 X14.0
26 X14.1
27 X14.2
28 X14.3
29 X14.4
30 X14.5
31 X14.6
32 X14.7
XT1 (pin size: M3.5)
2 NOTE2
4 NOTE2
6 DICOM1
8 +24V
10
12 Y7.1
14 +24V
16 DOCOM1
18 Y9.0
20 Y9.2
22 Y9.4
24 Y9.6
26 Y10.0
28 Y10.2
30 Y10.4
32 Y10.6
34 0V
36 0V
1 NOTE2
3 NOTE2
5 X7.7
7 X8.4
9 X8.5
11 Y7.0
13 Y7.6
15 DOCOM2
17 DOCOM3
19 Y9.1
21 Y9.3
23 Y9.5
25 Y9.7
27 Y10.1
29 Y10.3
31 Y10.5
33 Y10.7
35 0V
37 0V
+24V or DOCOM2
NOTE1 Enclosed in parentheses are addresses allocated for the
second connector panel.2 XT (1), (2), (3), and (4) are not wired inside the connector
panel and are used to relay signals.
B–63393EN/02 8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
103
This section describes input signal connections to be made when theconnector panel is used.
Up to 70 signals can be connected (24 signals on the basic module22signals and 24 signals on expansion modules)
RV
RV
24VXT1(14)
CE62(42)
CE62(43)
CE62(44)
CE62(45)
CE62(46)
CE62(47)
CE62(48)
CE62(49)
DICOM1
Pin number
X7.0
CE62(32)
XT1(34)
CE62(25)
CE62(26)
CE62(27)
CE62(28)
CE62(29)
XT1 (7)
CE62(31)
XT1(6)
24 V regulated power supply
24V 0V
Basic module
X7.1
X7.2
X7.3
X7.4
X7.5
X7.6
X7.7
X8.0
X8.1
X8.2
X8.3
X8.4
X8.5
X8.6
X8.7
CE62(24)
CE62(30)
XT1 (9)
XT1(8)
24V
24V 0V
XT1(5)
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
8.5.7.2Input signal connection
8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63393EN/02
104
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
CE62(10)
CE62(11)
CE62(12)
CE62(13)
CE62(14)
CE62(15)
CE62(16)
CE62(17)
Pin number
X9.0
24V
X9.1
X9.2
X9.3
X9.5
X9.6
X9.6
X9.7
Basic module
24V
NOTEThe above figure shows the addresses assigned for the first connector panel.X7.0 through X7.7 are input signals for which a common voltage can be selected. That is, byconnecting the DICOM1 CE62 (24) pin to the +24 V power supply, an input signal can be inputwith its logical state reversed. If, however, the cable is connected to ground, it has the sameeffect as inputting an ON state input signal. To prevent such accidents, the connection of theDICOM1 CE62 (24) pin to 0 V is recommended wherever possible.For unused input signals allocated to addresses X8.0 through X8.7 or X9.0 through X9.7 forwhich the common voltage is fixed, the logical state is fixed to “0”. For unused pins allocatedto addresses X7.0 through X7.7 for which the common voltage can be selected, the logical stateis fixed to “0” when the DICOM1 CE62 (24) pin is connected to 0 V. When the DICOM1 CE62(24) pin is connected to +24 V, the logical state is fixed to “1”. When the DICOM1 pin CE62(24) pin is open, the logical state of the unused pins allocated to addresses X7.0 through X7.7is undefined. For the second and subsequent connector panels, addresses are assigned in thesame way.
B–63393EN/02 8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
105
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
24 V or DOCOM2
CE63(42)
CE63(43)
CE63(44)
CE63(45)
CE63(46)
CE63(47)
CE63(48)
DICOM2
Pin number
X10.0
CE63(32)
CE63(25)
CE63(26)
CE63(27)
CE63(28)
CE63(29)
CE63(30)
CE63(31)
CE63(24)
Expansion module 1
24V
XT1(10)
0 V
X10.1
X10.2
X10.3
X10.4
X10.5
X10.6
X11.0
X11.1
X11.2
X11.3
X11.4
X11.5
X11.6
X11.7
24V 0V
*
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
NOTEThe input signals indicated on this page cannot be used in expansion module C (2A outputmodule).To the pin indicated by *, always connect 24 V when expansion module B is used; whenexpansion module C (2A output module) is used, connect DOCOM.
8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63393EN/02
106
RVCE63(10)
CB150(11)
CB150(12)
CB150(13)
CB150(14)
CB150(15)
CB150(16)
Pin number
X12.0
X12.1
Expansion module 1
24V
X12.2
X12.3
X12.4
X12.5
X12.6
24V
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
NOTEThe input signals indicated on this page cannot be used in expansion module C (2 A outputmodule).The above figure shows the addresses assigned for the first connector panel.X10.0 through X10.6 are input signals for which a common voltage can be selected. That is,by connecting the DICOM2 CE63 (24) pin to the +24 V power supply, an input signal can beinput with its logical state reversed. If, however, the cable is connected to ground, it has thesame effect as inputting an ON state input signal. To prevent such accidents, the connectionof the DICOM2 CE63 (24) pin to 0 V is recommended wherever possible.
For unused input signals allocated to addresses X11.0 through X11.7 or X12.0 through X12.6for which the common voltage is fixed, the logical state is fixed to “0”. For unused pins allocatedto addresses X10.0 through X10.7 for which the common voltage can be selected, the logicalstate is fixed to “0” when the DICOM2 CE63 (24) pin is connected to 0 V. When the DICOM2CE63 (24) pin is connected to +24 V, the logical state is fixed to “1”. When the DICOM2 CE63(24) pin is open, the logical state of the unused pins allocated to addresses X10.0 throughX10.6 is undefined. For the second and subsequent connector panels, addresses are assignedin the same way.
B–63393EN/02 8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
107
RVCE64(42)
CE64(43)
CE64(44)
CE64(45)
CE64(46)
CE64(47)
CE64(48)
CE64(49)
DICOM3
Pin number
X13.0
CE64(32)
CE64(25)
CE64(26)
CE64(27)
CE64(28)
CE64(29)
CE64(30)
CE64(31)
CE64(24)
Expansion module 224V 0 V
X13.1
X13.2
X13.3
X13.4
X13.5
X13.6
X13.7
X14.0
X14.1
X14.2
X14.3
X14.4
X14.5
X14.6
X14.7
24V
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
0 V
8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63393EN/02
108
RVCE64(10)
CE64(11)
CE64(12)
CE64(13)
CE64(14)
CE64(15)
CE64(16)
CE64(17)
Pin number
X15.0
24V
X15.1
X15.2
X15.3
X15.4
X15.5
X15.6
X15.7
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
Expansion module 2
NOTEThe above figure shows the addresses assigned for the first connector panel.
X13.0 through X13.7 are input signals for which a common voltage can be selected. That is,by connecting the DICOM3 CE64 (24) pin to the +24 V power supply, an input signal can beinput with its logical state reversed. If, however, the cable is connected to ground, it has thesame effect as inputting an ON state input signal. To prevent such accidents, the connectionof the DICOM3 CE64 (24) pin to 0 V is recommended wherever possible.
For unused input signals allocated to addresses X14.0 through X14.7 or X15.0 through X15.7for which the common voltage is fixed, the logical state is fixed to “0”. For unused pins allocatedto addresses X13.0 through X13.7 for which the common voltage can be selected, the logicalstate is fixed to “0” when the DICOM3 CE64 (24) pin is connected to 0 V. When the DICOM3CE64 (24) pin is connected to +24 V, the logical state is fixed to “1”. When the DICOM3 pinCE64 (24) pin is open, the logical state of the unused pins allocated to addresses X13.0 throughX13.7 is undefined. For the second and subsequent connector panels, addresses are assignedin the same way.
B–63393EN/02 8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
109
This section describes the output signal connections to be made when theconnector panel is used.
Up to 48 signals can be connected (16 signals on the basic module16signals on an expansion module2)
DOCOM1XT1(16)
CE62(34)
CE62(35)
CE62(36)
CE62(37)
CE62(38)
CE62(39)
CE62(40)
Y7.0
CE62(02)
CE62(03)
CE62(04)
CE62(05)
CE62(06)
CE62(07)
CE62(08)
DVRelay
DV
CE62(41)
CE62(09)
24V regulated power supply
24V 0V
XT1(35), (36), (37)
Basic module
0V
Y7.1
Y7.2
Y7.3
Y7.4
Y7.5
Y7.6
Y7.7
Y8.0
Y8.1
Y8.2
Y8.3
Y8.4
Y8.5
Y8.6
Y8.7
DV
DV
DV
DV
DV
DV
DV
DV
DV
DV
DV
DV
DV
DV
XT1(11)
XT1(12)
XT1(13)
NOTEThe above figure shows the addresses assigned for the firstconnector panel.
8.5.7.3Output signalconnection
8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63393EN/02
110
DOCOM2
CE63(34)
CE63(35)
CE63(36)
CE63(37)
CE63(38)
CE63(39)
CE63(40)
Y9.0
CE63(02)
CE63(03)
CE63(04)
CE63(05)
CE63(06)
CE63(07)
CE63(08)
DV
Relay
DV
CE63(41)
CE63(09)
Expansion module 1
0V
0V
Y9.1
Y9.2
Y9.3
Y9.4
Y9.5
Y9.6
Y9.7
Y10.0
Y10.1
Y10.2
Y10.3
Y10.4
Y10.5
Y10.6
Y10.7
XT1(19)
XT1(20)
XT1(21)
XT1(22)
XT1(23)
XT1(24)
XT1(26)
XT1(27)
XT1(28)
XT1(29)
XT1(30)
XT1(31)
XT1(32)
XT1(25)
XT1(33)
XT1(18)
DV
DV
DV
DVDV
DV
DV
DV
DV
DV
DV
DV
DV
DV
DV
24V regulated power supply
24V 0V
XT1(15)
NOTEThe above figure shows the addresses assigned for the firstconnector panel.When using the 2 A output module, connect the load toterminal block XT1.
B–63393EN/02 8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
111
DOCOM3
Relay
Expansion module 2
Y11.0
Y11.1
Y11.2
Y11.3
Y11.4
Y11.5
Y11.6
Y11.7
Y12.0
Y12.1
Y12.2
Y12.3
Y12.4
Y12.5
Y12.6
Y12.7
CE64(34)
CE64(35)
CE64(02)
0V
CE64(36)
CE64(37)
CE64(38)
CE64(39)
CE64(40)
CE64(41)
CE64(03)
CE64(04)
CE64(05)
CE64(06)
CE64(07)
CE64(08)
CE64(09)
DV
DV
DV
DV
DV
DV
DV
DV
DV
DV
DV
DV
DV
DV
DV
DV
24V regulated power supply
24V 0V
XT1(17)
NOTEThe above figure shows the addresses assigned for the firstconnector panel.
8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63393EN/02
112
This section describes the specifications of the input/output signals usedwith the basic module and expansion module B.
Input signal specifications
Number of points 24 points (per module)
Contact rating 30 VDC, 16 mA or more
Leakage current betweencontacts when opened
1 mA or less (26.4 V)
Voltage decrease betweencontacts when closed
2 V or less (including a cable voltage decrease)
Delay time The receiver delay time is 2 ms (maximum). Inaddition, [I/O Link transfer time between CNC andI/O module (2 ms maximum)] + [ladder scan period(depending on CNC)] must be considered.
Output signal specifications
Number of points 16 points (per module)
Maximum load currentwhen ON
200 mA or less including momentary variations
Saturation voltage whenON
1 V (maximum) when the load current is 200 mA
Withstand voltage 24 V +20% or less including momentary variations
Leakage current whenOFF
20 µA or less
Delay time The driver delay time is 50 µs (maximum). Inaddition, [I/O Link transfer time between CNC andI/O module (2 ms maximum)] + [ladder scan period(depending on CNC)] needs to be considered.
ON/OFF of the power supply (DO common) for output signalsBy turning off (opening) the power supply pin (DOCOM) for the outputsignals, all the output signals of each module can be turned off at the sametime. At this time, the states of output signals are as shown below.
DOCOMON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
State of outputsignal when out-put signal is on in the sequence
State of outputsignalwhen out-put signal is offin the sequence
8.5.8Input/Output SignalSpecifications
B–63393EN/02 8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
113
NOTEWhen output signal is on in the sequence, the ON/OFF stateof DOCOM is directly reflected in the state of output signalas indicated above by the dashed box. The +24 V signal tobe supplied to the I/O module must not be turned off duringoperation. Otherwise, a CNC communication alarm isissued. Ensure that +24 V is supplied either when or beforethe power to the CNC is turned on, and that +24 V isremoved either when or after the power to the CNC is turnedoff.
Parallel output signal connection A output signal load current of twice the level can be obtained byconnecting output signal points in parallel and exercising ON/OFFcontrol at the same time in the sequence. Namely, the maximum loadcurrent per output signal point is 200 mA. By connecting two outputsignal points in parallel and turning on the two DO points at the sametime, 400 mA can be obtained. In this case, however, the leakage currentis doubled up to 40 µA when the output signal points are turned off.
DOCOM
DV
+24V 0V
DV
+24 V regulated power supply
Relay
8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63393EN/02
114
This section describes the specifications of the 2A output signals usedwith expansion module C.
Output signal specification
Number of points 32 points (per module)
Maximum load currentwhen ON
2 A or less per point.12 A maximum for the entire module (DO: 16 points) (including momentary variations).
Withstand voltage 24 V 20% or less (including momentaryvariations)
Leakage current when OFF 100 µA or less
Delay time [I/O Link transfer time (2 ms maximum)][ladderscan period (depending on CNC)] must beconsidered.
ON/OFF of the power supply (DO common) for output signals By turning off (opening) the power supply pin (DOCOM) for the outputsignals, all the output signals of each module can be turned off at one time.At this time, the state of output signal is as shown below.
DOCOMON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
State when out-put signal is onin the sequence
State when out-put signal is offin the sequence
NOTEWhen output signal is on in the sequence, the ON/OFF stateof DOCOM is directly reflected in the state of output signalas indicated above by the dashed box. The 24 V signalto be supplied to the I/O module must not be turned offduring operation. Otherwise, a CNC communication alarmis issued. Ensure that 24 V is supplied either when orbefore the power to the CNC is turned on, and that 24 Vis removed either when or after the power to the CNC isturned off.
Parallel output signal connection The 2 A output module does not allow parallel output signal connectionsincluding parallel connections with the output signals of other modules.
8.5.92 A Output DO SignalSpecifications
B–63393EN/02 8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
115
LEDs for outputsignal checking
Thorough holes forinput signal checking
Bas
ic m
odul
e
Exp
ansi
on m
odul
e 1
Exp
ansi
on m
odul
e 2
CE
62
CE
63
CE
64
8.5.10Outline Drawing
8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63393EN/02
116
Input and output signals can be checked using the following methods:
(1)Checking an input signalUsing a volt–ohm meter, read the voltage between the through holes(between an input signal and 0V) on the connector panel to check theinput signal.The through hole layout is shown in the figure below.
(2)Checking an output signalTo check an output signal, check whether the LED on the connectorpanel is on. Moreover, the voltage of an output signal can be measuredbetween through holes (between the output signal and 0 V) under theLED.The LED layout is shown in the figure below.
Address
Bit
Through hole (input signal)
Through hole (input signal)
NOTEFirst connector panel: XmX7Second connector panel: XmX23Third connector panel: Xm=X39Fourth connector panel: Xm=X80Fifth connector panel: Xm=X96Sixth connector panel: Xm=X112
0V
Bit
Address
Through hole (output signal)
LED
Through hole (0V)
8.5.11Checking the Input andOutput Signals
B–63393EN/02 8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
117
NOTEFirst connector panel: YnY7Second connector panel: YnY15Third connector panel: Ym=Y23Fourth connector panel: Ym=Y68Fifth connector panel: Ym=Y76Sixth connector panel: Ym=Y84
Modules can be connected in the same way, regardless of whether you areconnecting the basic module to an extension module or connecting twoextension modules. Connect the modules by using 34–pin flat cableconnectors as shown in the figure below. Ensure that all 34 pins at oneend of the cable are connected to the corresponding pins at the other end;e.g., connect the A1 pin to the pin having the same designation (A1) atthe other end.
Connector panel side Connector panel side Connector panel side
A1 pin mark
34–p
in fl
at c
able
34–p
in fl
at c
able
34–p
in fl
at c
able
Basic module Extension module Extension module
CA
52
CA
52
CA
53
CA
52
Top view
Flat cable–side connector specification: HIF3BA–34DA–2.54R (Hirose Electric Co., Ltd.)
Module connector–side specification: HIF3BA–34PA–2.54DS (Hirose Electric Co., Ltd.) or FAP–3403–1202–0BS (Yamaichi Denki Co., Ltd.)
CA
55
Ventilationslot
8.5.12Connection of Basicand Extension Modules
8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63393EN/02
118
NOTEModules need to be spaced at least 32 mm apart, in which case a flat cable of about 20 mmin length is required. To install modules further away from each other, the cable length will be20 mm plus the extra distance. Note that the maximum length of a flat cable is 100 mm. Toensure adequate ventilation, install the modules in such a way that the flat cables lie on top ofthem.
If a system alarm occurs in a CNC using the connector panel I/O module,or if I/O Link communication between the CNC and connector panel I/Omodule fails, all the output signals of the I/O module are turned off.Therefore, due care must be taken when setting up the machine sequence.Also, the same phenomenon occurs if the power to the CNC or the I/Omodule is turned off.
The output signal driver of the Basic and Extension module A/B iscapable of detecting an overcurrent and measuring its own temperature.If an accident, such as the connecting of the cable to ground, causes anabnormal increase in the load current or in the driver temperature, aprotection circuit, which is provided for each output signal driver (1 byte),is activated and keeps the output signal for the relevant 1 byte in the OFFstate until the cause of the problem is eliminated. The output signal driverthat detected the abnormality can be determined by the input signal. Therelationship between the input signal address bits and output signal areasis shown in the table below. When an input signal address bit is set to 1it indicates that the corresponding output signal driver detected anabnormality. If an output signal becomes abnormal, you can check thePMCDGN screen of the CNC, which will help you investigate the failureand perform recovery.
For the first connector panel
Alarm detectionaddress and bit DO address Location
X22.0 Y7 Basic module
X22.1 Y8 Basic module
X22.2 Y9 Extension module 1
X22.3 Y10 Extension module 1
X22.4 Y11 Extension module 2
X22.5 Y12 Extension module 2
When an abnormality in output signal is detected, the CNC issues an alarm.
8.5.13Other Notes
DO signal reaction to asystem alarm
Output signal alarmdetection
B–63393EN/02 8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
119
For the second connector panel
Alarm detectionaddress and bit DO address Location
X38.0 Y15 Basic module
X38.1 Y16 Basic module
X38.2 Y17 Extension module 1
X38.3 Y18 Extension module 1
X38.4 Y19 Extension module 2
X38.5 Y20 Extension module 2
When an abnormality in output signal is detected, the CNC issues an alarm.
For the third connector panel
Alarm detectionaddress and bit DO address Location
X54.0 Y23 Basic module
X54.1 Y24 Basic module
X54.2 Y25 Extension module 1
X54.3 Y26 Extension module 1
X54.4 Y27 Extension module 2
X54.5 Y28 Extension module 2
Even when an abnormality in output signal is detected, the CNC does notissue any alarm. Use a PMC ladder program to monitor the bits of X54and issue an alarm if 1 is detected.
For the fourth connector panel
Alarm detectionaddress and bit DO address Location
X95.0 Y68 Basic module
X95.1 Y69 Basic module
X95.2 Y70 Extension module 1
X95.3 Y71 Extension module 1
X95.4 Y72 Extension module 2
X95.5 Y73 Extension module 2
Even when an abnormality in output signal is detected, the CNC does notissue any alarm. Use a PMC ladder program to monitor the bits of X95and issue an alarm if 1 is detected.
8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63393EN/02
120
For the fifth connector panel
Alarm detectionaddress and bit DO address Location
X111.0 Y76 Basic module
X111.1 Y77 Basic module
X111.2 Y78 Extension module 1
X111.3 Y79 Extension module 1
X111.4 Y80 Extension module 2
X111.5 Y81 Extension module 2
Even when an abnormality in output signal is detected, the CNC does notissue any alarm. Use a PMC ladder program to monitor the bits of X111and issue an alarm if 1 is detected.
For the sixth connector panel
Alarm detectionaddress and bit DO address Location
X127.0 Y84 Basic module
X127.1 Y85 Basic module
X127.2 Y86 Extension module 1
X127.3 Y87 Extension module 1
X127.4 Y88 Extension module 2
X127.5 Y89 Extension module 2
Even when an abnormality in output signal is detected, the CNC does notissue any alarm. Use a PMC ladder program to monitor the bits of X127and issue an alarm if 1 is detected.
NOTEThis function is not supported by the 2A output module oranalog input module.
B–63393EN/02 8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
121
When the 10.4″ LCD (with touch panel and operator’s panel I/O) (calledthe LCD unit hereinafter) is used, the connectors on the rear of the LCDunit are used to connect the I/O signals from the operator’s panel (signalsfor buttons and lamps).
These I/O signals are connected to the CNC through the I/O Link, so thatthey can be used with a PMC ladder. When a PLC supplied by anothermanufacturer is used without using the PMC ladder, an image of these I/Osignals is transferred to and from the PLC, so that these signals can beused with a ladder on the PLC.
The rear view of the LCD unit (uncovered) is given below.
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
MDI signal inputCA55
LCD signal(HSSB)COP20B
For 24 Vbranch–outCP1B
24 V inputCP1A
LCD control and operator’s panel I/Oprinted circuit board
ÂÂ
M4 stud for protective grounding (PE)Connect this to ground.
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Inverter printed circuit board
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Connection to manualpulse generatorJA60
I/O Link (upper)JD1B
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
I/O signalconnectionCE56
I/O Link (lower)JD1A
8.6OPERATOR’S PANELI/O CONNECTIONFOR 10.4″ LCD UNIT
8.6.1Connector Layout
8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63393EN/02
122
10.4″ LCD unit (withtouch panel andoperator’s panel I/O)
CP1A CP1B
COP20B
JD1B JD1A
JA60
CE56
This signal is not connected through the LCDunit but is connected directly to the powermagnetics cabinet.
24 VDC (main CPUboard)
LCD signal (HSSB)(main CPU board)
Higher unit of I/O Link
Manual pulse generator(axis and magnificationselection signals)
Powermagneticscabinet
Emergencystop
Operationready
Operator’s panel(buttons and lamps)
8.6.2Overall ConnectionDiagram
B–63393EN/02 8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
123
The function of this unit is equivalent to the operator’s panel I/O module,using 16 bytes for input signals and 4 bytes for output signals.
Assignment module namesInput (X64 to X79) : CM16IOutput (Y64 to Y67) : CM04O
Then, the input/output signals are defined as follows:
Input signals
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
X64Individual Continuous Reserved 2 Reserved 1
Continuouscut
Start/resetand start
Return ExecutionX64
SSW2 SSW1 PB4 PB3 PB2 PB1
X65
Axisselection6th axis
Axisselection5th axis
Reserved 8 Reserved 7 Reserved 6 Reserved 5 Reserved 4 Reserved 3
H6 H5
X66
Axisselection1/2 path
Magnification100
Magnification10
Magnification1
Axisselection
B
Axisselection
Z
Axisselection
Y
Axisselection
X
SEL2 100 10 1 HB HZ HY HX
X67 to X75: Unused
Manual pulse generatorX76
X77 to X78: Unused
X79Unused
Outputsignal alarm
65
Outputsignal alarm
64
DOALM65 DOALM64
Output signals
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Y64
Returnenable
Start/resetand start
Total failure Door openFull of
workpiecesNo
workpieceOperation in
progressReserved 1
Y64
PL8 PL7 PL6 PL5 PL4 PL3 PL2
Reserved 8 Reserved 7 Reserved 6 Reserved 5 Reserved 4 Reserved 3 Reserved 2 Reserved 1Y65
Y66 to Y67: Unused
See the section “CONNECTION WITH THE LCD UNIT” in Chapter 5.
8.6.3I/O Link Assignment
8.6.4Power SupplyConnection
8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63393EN/02
124
A B
01 0V +24V
02 PB1(X64.0) PB2(X64.1)
03 PB3(X64.2) PB4(X64.3)
04 Reserved 1(X64.4) Reserved 1(X64.5)
05 SSW1(X64.6) SSW2(X64.7)
06 Reserved 3(X65.0) Reserved 4(X65.1)
07 Reserved 5(X65.2) Reserved 6(X65.3)
08 Reserved 7(X65.4) Reserved 8(X65.5)
09 H5(X65.6) H6(X65.7)
10 HX(X66.0) HY(X66.1)
11 HZ(66.2) HB(X66.3)
12 X1(X66.4) X10(X66.5)
13 X100(X66.6) SEL2(X66.7)
14
15
16 Reserved 1(Y64.0) PL2(Y64.1)
17 PL3(Y64.2) PL4(Y64.3)
18 PL5(Y64.4) PL6(Y65.5)
19 PL7(Y64.6) PL8(Y65.7)
20 Reserved 9 Reserved 2(Y65.1)
21 Reserved 3(Y65.2) Reserved 4(Y65.3)
22 Reserved 5(Y65.4) Reserved 6(Y65.5)
23 Reserved 7(Y65.6) Reserved 8(Y65.7)
24 DOCOM DOCOM
25 DOCOM DOCOM
CE56
Flat–cable–side connector specification: A02B–0120–K342(HIFBB–50D–2.54R (Hirose Electric Co., Ltd.))50 contacts
Cable specifications: A02B–0120–K886(Hitachi Cable, Ltd. or Oki Electric Cable Co., Ltd., 50 conductors, 60 m long)
NOTEThe following signals are also assigned to the pins ofconnector JA60 (manual pulse generator interface), andmay be connected to either of connectors CE56 and JA60.
Signal AddressHX X66.0HY X66.1HZ X66.2HB H66.3X1 X66.4X10 X66.5X100 X66.6SEL2 X66.7
H5 X65.6H6 X65.7
8.6.5I/O Connector PinAssignment
B–63393EN/02 8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
125
RV
24V CE56(B01)
CE56(A02)
CE56(B02)
CE56(A03)
CE56(B03)
CE56(A04)
CE56(B04)
CE56(A05)
CE56(B05)
PB1(X64.0)
CE56(B09)
CE56(A06)
CE56(B06)
CE56(A07)
CE56(B07)
CE56(A08)
CE56(B08)
CE56(A09)
PB2(X64.1)
PB3(X64.2)
PB4(X64.3)
Reserved 1(X64.4)
SSW1(X64.6)
SSW2(X64.7)
Reserved 3(X65.0)
Reserved 4(X65.1)
Reserved 5(X65.2)
Reserved 6(X65.3)
Reserved 7(X65.4)
Reserved 8(X65.5)
H5(X65.6)
H6(X65.7)
Reserved 2(X64.5)
Address number
Bit number
Pin number
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
8.6.6Input SignalConnection
8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63393EN/02
126
24V CE56(B01)
CE56(A10)
CE56(B10)
CE56(A11)
CE56(B11)
CE56(A12)
CE56(B12)
CE56(A13)
CE56(B13)
HX(X66.0)
Address numberBit number
HY(X66.1)
HZ(X66.2)
HB(X66.3)
X1(X66.4)
X10(X66.5)
X100(X66.6)
SEL2(X66.7)
Pin number
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
B–63393EN/02 8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
127
DOCOM CE56(A24,B24,A25,B25)
CE56(A16)
CE56(B16)
CE56(A17)
CE56(B17)
CE56(A18)
CE56(B18)
CE56(A19)
Pin number
Reserved 1(Y64.0)
Address numberBit number
CE56(A20)
CE56(B20)
CE56(A21)
CE56(B21)
CE56(A22)
CE56(B22)
CE56(A23)
DV
+24 V regulated power supply
+24V 0V
Relay
DV
CE56(B19)
CE56(B23)
CE56(A01)
Reserved 9(Y65.0)
Reserved 2(Y65.1)
Reserved 3(Y65.2)
Reserved 4(Y65.3)
Reserved 5(Y65.4)
Reserved 6(Y65.5)
Reserved 7(Y65.6)
Reserved 8(Y65.7)
PL2(Y64.1)
PL3(Y64.2)
PL4(Y64.3)
PL5(Y64.4)
PL6(Y64.5)
PL7(Y64.6)
PL8(Y64.7)
DV
DV
DV
DV
DV
DV
DV
DV
DV
DV
DV
DV
DV
DV
8.6.7Output SignalConnection
8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63393EN/02
128
When the 10.4″ LCD (with touch panel and operator’s panel I/O) is used,the wiring inside the operator’s panel is as follows:
0VCE56(A01)
Power supply
Operation in progress PL2 (Y64.1)
CE56(B16)
No workpiece PL3 (Y64.2)CE56(A17)
Full of workpieces PL4 (Y64.3)CE56(B17)
Door open PL5 (Y64.4)CE56(A18)
Total failure PL6 (Y64.5)CE56(A18)
Start/reset and start PL7 (Y64.6)
CE56(A19)
Return enable PL8 (Y64.7)CE56(B19)
Emergency stop24VCE56(B01)
SSW1 (X64.6)CE56(A05)
SelectorContinuous
SSW2 (X64.7)CE56(A05)
Selector
Individual
PB1 (X64.0)CE56(A02)
Execution
PB2 (X64.1)CE56(B02)
Return (B contact)
Start/reset and start PB3 (X64.2)CE56(A03)
PB4 (X64.3)CE56(B03)
Continuous cut (B contact)
 W
O Â
R Â
R Â
R Â
R Â
O Â
Y Â
RÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂ
ÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂ
ÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂ
ÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂ
ÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂ
ÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂ
ÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂ
8.6.8Wiring Inside theOperator’s Panel
B–63393EN/02 8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
129
The following signal lines are not routed through the LCD unit and areinstead connected directly to the power magnetics cabinet:
Operation ready
Emergency stop
GOperation ready
One manual pulse generator can be connected to this LCD unit. For themanual pulse generator, interfaces for ten input signals including six axisselection signals, three magnification selection signals, and one pathselection signal are provided in the same connector.
JA60(PCR–E20LMDT)1 HA1 11 HX(X66.0)2 HB1 12 HY(X66.1)3 +5V 13 HZ(X66.2)4 0V 14 HB(X66.3)5 +5V 15 X1(X66.4)6 0V 16 X10(X66.5)7 +5V 17 X100(X66.6)8 0V 18 SEL2(X66.7)9 H5(X65.6) 19 H6(X65.7)
10 0V 20 +24V
LCD unit
Manual pulse generator
+5V 0V HA1 HB1
COM X1 X10 X100
HX HY HZ HB
SEL2 H5 H6
Manual pulse generator
Relayconnector
8.6.9Connection of aManual PulseGenerator
8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63393EN/02
130
Relay connector Manual pulse generator
Cable connection example
HA1
HB1
+5V
0V
+24V
HX
HY
HZ
HB
X1
X10
X100
SEL2
H5
H6
HA1
HB1
+5V
0V
COM
HX
HY
HZ
HB
X1
X10
X100
SEL2
H5
H6
1
2
3,5,7
4,6,8,10
20
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
HA1
HB1
+5V
0V
JA60
18
9
19
Recommended connector: A02B–0120–K305 (including the following connector and housing)(Connector: FI40B–20S, soldering type, Hirose Electric Co., Ltd.)(Housing: FI40–20–CV5, Hirose Electric Co., Ltd.)
Outside cable diameter: 9.2 mm maximum
NOTEFor the axis selection signals (HX, HY, HZ, and HB),magnification selection signals (X1, X10, and X100), andreserved–11 signal, the +24 V power supply is used as thecommon voltage. If the contact connected to a signal isopen, the signal state becomes 0. If the contact is closed,the signal state becomes 1.These signals are also assigned to the pins of connectorCE56 (I/O signal connector), so they may be connected toeither connector.
B–63393EN/02 8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
131
10.4″ LCD unit I/O specifications
Item Specification Remarks
Input signal points 24 points 24 V input
Output signal points 16 points 24 V source type output
CNC interface FANUC I/O Linkconnection
MPG interface Max. 1 unit
I/O power supply rating
Supply voltage Power supplyrating Remarks
24 VDC ±10% is suppliedfrom power supplyconnector CPD1. Thetolerance of ±10% includesmomentary and ripplecurrents.
0.3 A+7.3 mA×DI DI = number of input signalpoints in the ON stateThe power supply rating onthe I/O function side. Therequired power supply is thesum of this value and thepower supply rating on theLCD side, which is 1.0 A.
Input signal specifications
Contact rating 30 VDC, 16 mA or more
Open circuit intercontact leakagecurrent
1 mA or less (at 26.4 V)
Closed circuit intercontact voltagedrop
2 V or less (including cable voltage drop)
Delay Receiver delay: Max. 2 msThe time required for I/O Linktransmission between the CNC and unit(max. 2 msladder scan cycle) mustalso be taken into account.
Output signal specifications
Maximum load current in ON state 200 mA or less (including momentary current)
Saturation voltage in ON state Max. 1 V (when load current is 200 mA)
Withstand voltage 24 V +20% or less (including momentary values)
Leakage current in OFF state 20 A or less
Delay Driver delay: Max. 50 sThe time for I/O Link transmissionbetween the CNC and unit (max. 2 msladder scan cycle) must also be takeninto account.
8.6.10Specifications
8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63393EN/02
132
NOTEEnsure that the maximum current per DOCOM pin (DOpower supply pin) does not exceed 0.7 A.
If a system alarm occurs in a CNC using this I/O module, or if I/O Linkcommunication fails, all the output signals of the I/O module are turnedoff. Therefore, due care must be taken when setting up the machinesequence. Also, the same phenomenon occurs if the power of the CNCor the I/O module is turned off.
The output signal driver of the I/O module is capable of detecting anovercurrent and measuring its own temperature. If an accident, such asthe connecting of the cable to ground, causes an abnormal increase in theload current or in the driver temperature, a protection circuit, which isprovided for each output signal driver (1 byte), is activated and keeps theoutput signal for the relevant 1 byte in the OFF state until the cause of theproblem is eliminated. The input signal address X79 identifies the outputsignal driver which has detected the alarm. The following table shows thecorrespondence between the input signal address X79 bits and the outputsignal addresses. Bit value “1” indicates that the corresponding outputsignal driver has detected an alarm. The contents of the X79 area can bechecked by using the DGN screen of the CNC. This helps alarm detectionand recovery.
If an abnormality in an output signal is detected, the CNC issues an alarm.
Alarm detectionaddress and bit Output signal address Remarks
X79.0 Y64
X79.1 Y65
8.6.11Other Notes
DO signal reaction to asystem alarm
Output signal alarmdetection
B–63393EN/02 8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
133
In a system using the Series 18i–LNA, the operator’s panel I/O moduleis used only to connect a manual pulse generator.
JA3
CPD1(IN)
CE56
+24V
CE57
CPD1(OUT)+24V
Powersupply
Powersupply
JD1B
JD1A
MPG
To the higher unitof the I/O Link
To the lower unit ofthe I/O Link
8.7CONNECTION OFOPERATOR’S PANELI/O MODULE
8.7.1Overall ConnectionDiagram
8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63393EN/02
134
Provide the CPD1 (IN) connector, shown below, with the powernecessary for the printed circuit board operation. To facilitate powerdivision, the power is output to CPD1 (OUT) exactly as it is input fromCPD1 (IN). When power division is required, use CPD1 (OUT).
01 24V02 0V03
CPD1(IN)
01 24V02 0V03
CPD1(OUT)
24 V powersupply
24 V powersupply
Recommended cable–side connector: A02B–0120–K324 (including the following connector housing and case)(Housing: Japan AMP 1–178288–3)(Contacts: Japan AMP 1–175218–5)
NOTEThe specification of the power supply connector CPD1 (IN)is the same as that for CPD1 (OUT). There are noindications on the printed circuit board to distinguishbetween the IN and OUT connectors. Do not turn off the +24V supply to the connector during operation. Turning off the24 V supply will cause a CNC system alarm. Whenturning on the power, the +24 V supply to the I/O modulemust be turned on before or at the same time as the powersupply to the CNC. When turning off the power, the 24 Vsupply to the I/O module must be turned off after or at thesame time as the power supply to the CNC.
8.7.2Power Connection
B–63393EN/02 8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
135
An example in which one manual pulse generators are connected tooperator’s panel I/O module is shown below.
18
+5V
17
10
30V
0V
+5V
1314
1615
1920
+5V
4
65
87
9
HB1 0V
1112
HA112
JA3 (PCR–E20LMDT)
+5V 0V HA1 HB1+5V 0V A B
I/O module for operator’s panel Manual pulse generators
Manual pulse generator #1 (M3 screw terminal)
#1 HA1 HB1 +5V 0V
HA1HB1+5V
0V
12912
7Red
7White
5Red
2Black
AB+5V0V
HA1HB1+5V
0VShield
Cable connection
Terminal blockManual pulsegenerators
Ground plateCable Wire
Recommended wire material: A66L–0001–0286 (#20 AWG × 6 + #24 AWG × 3 pairs)
Recommended connector: A02B–0120–K303 (including the following connector and case)(Connector: FI40–2015S (Hirose Electric Co., Ltd.))(Case: FI40–20–CV5 (Hirose Electric Co., Ltd.))
NOTEOnly one manual pulse generator can be connected to theSeries 18i–LNA.
8.7.3Manual PulseGenerator Connection
0.2
0.1 R 2Lm
L
mR
L
30.0394
76.75[m]
8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63393EN/02
136
Manual pulse generator operates on 5 VDC. The supply voltage drop dueto the cable resistance must be held below 0.2 V (when those of the 0–voltand 5–volt wires are combined), as expressed in the following expression:
Where0.1 = manual pulse generator supply current (0.1 A)R = resistance per unit cable length (/m)m = number of 0–volt and 5–volt wiresL = cable length (m).
Therefore, the cable length can be determined using the followingexpression.
In the case of the A66L–0001–0286 cable, for example, when three pairsof signal wires and six power supply wires (20/0.18, 0.0394 /m) areused (three power supply wires connected to 5 V and the other three to 0V), the cable length is:
However, the maximum pulse transmission distance for the manual pulsegenerator is 50 m. Taking this into consideration, the cable length maybe extended to:
8.7.4Cable Length forManual PulseGenerator
B–63393EN/02 8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
137
NoteNote) Lead wires and other components are mounted on the rear
face of the printed circuit board. Ensure that the printed circuitboards are spaced 5 mm or more from one another to preventinterference.
24 V power supply connectionManual pulse generator connection
I/O Link signal connection
Machine operator’s panel DI/DO interface
Rear mounting area (Perspective drawingviewed from the front)
: Polarity guide
: A1 pin mark
8.7.5External View
8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63393EN/02
138
Installation specifications
Ambient temperature During operation 0° to 58°CDuring storage and transportation –20°C to 60°C
Temperature change Max. 1.1°C/min.
Relative humidity Normal: 75% or lessShort term (1 month or less): 95% or less
Vibration During operation: 0.5 G or less
Environment Ordinary machining factory environment (Specialconsideration is required when installing the module ina dusty place or where highly concentrated cuttinglubricant or organic solvent is used.)
Other requirements (1) Install the I/O module in a fully enclosed cabinet.
Ordering specifications
Item Specification Remarks
Operator’s panel I/O module (with MPG interface)
A20B–2002–0520 DI: 48 points (cannot used)DO: 32 points (cannot used)MPG interface is supported.
Fuse (replacement part) A03B–0815–K001 1 A
Module specifications
Item Specification Remarks
CNC interface FANUC I/O Linkconnection
MPG interface 1 unit
Power supply rating
Module Supply voltage Power supplyrating Remarks
Operator’spanel I/Omodule
24 VDC ±10% issupplied frompower supplyconnector CPD1.The tolerance of±10% includesmomentary andripple currents.
0.35A
8.7.6Specifications
B–63393EN/02 8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
139
In a system using the Series 18i–LNA, this operator’s panel I/O modulecan be used only to connect a manual pulse generator.
Address allocation is shown in the table below. Since addresses arefactory allocated by FANUC, the machine tool builder need not performthe allocation.
X64
X65
X66
X67
Output signals(use inhibited)
X64
X65
X66
X67
X68
X69
X70
X71
X72
X73
X74
X75
X76(1st MPG)
X77(2nd MPG)
X78(3rd MPG)
X79(DO alarm detection)
Input signals(use inhibited)
Unused
MPG(Unused for the2nd and 3rdMPGs)
Unused
Input signals (16 bytes, X64 and up) Output signals (4 bytes, Y64 and up)
8.7.7Other Notes
Address allocation
8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63393EN/02
140
FANUC I/O Link–AS–i converter is stand alone unit which converts fromFANUC I/O Link (omit as I/O Link) to AS–i interface (omit as AS–i).
This unit converts form AS–i to I/O Link. And it makes possible to useDI/DO signals of AS–i slaves on PMC which is provided with CNC viaan I/O Link.
CNCand so on
I/O Link– AS–i
converter unit
I/O Unit
I/O Link
I/O LinkAS–i POWER
AS–i
Slave
AS–i
AS–i
Slave
AS–i
Slave
A03B–0817–C001
(1)Specification of AS–i sideNumber of I/O points
Max. DI:124 points, DO:124 pointsNumber of AS–i slaves
Max. 31 units
(2)Specification of I/O Link sideOccupied I/O points DI:256 points, DO:256 points
24VDC (10%) 100mA
2.4W
350g
8.8CONNECTION OFFANUC I/O LINK–AS–ICONVERTER
8.8.1Outline
8.8.1.1Strong point
8.8.1.2Ordering specification
8.8.1.3Specification
8.8.1.4Power supply
8.8.1.5Heat value
8.8.1.6Weight
B–63393EN/02 8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
141
I/O Link–AS–i converter has been designed on the assumption that theyare housed in closed cabinets. The environmental conditions wheninstalling these cabinets shall conform to the following.
(1)Surrounding temperatureDuring operation : 0 to 55CDuring preservation and transportation : –20 to 60C
(2)Temperature changing rate : Max. 1.1C/min
(3)HumidityNormal condition : 75% or less (no condensation)Short period ( one month or shorter ) : Max.95% (no
condensation)
(4)VibrationDuring operation : 0.5G or lessNon operation : 1.0G or less
(5)AtomosphereWhen the unit is used in areas with high density of dust, cutting fluid or organic solvent, the user should consult FANUC.
Unit : mm
8.8.2Installation
8.8.2.1Environmentalconditions
8.8.2.2Outer dimensions
8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63393EN/02
142
AS–i terminal
1) Cautions for mounting unit(1)Use the unit in a completely sealed cabinet.(2)Mount the unit on a vertical surface, and allow a space of at least
100 mm above and below the unit. Do not place any unit generatinga large amount of heat under the detector interface unit.
2) Details of mounting holes
Front view
Unit : mm
8.8.2.3Arrangement ofconnector
8.8.2.4Installation
B–63393EN/02 8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
143
CAUTIONThis unit reqires a clearance on both sides for maintenance purposes to accommodate ascrewdriver inserted obliquely when the detector interface unit is mounted or removed.As a guideline, allow a gap of at least about 20mm between this unit and each adjacent unitif the detector interface unit is not shorter than adjacent unit, and about 70mm if it is shorter.If this unit is mounted next to the side of the cabinet, allow a gap of at least about 70mm betweenthe unit and the cabinet side.
Maintenance clearance around unit.
Unit : mm
Top View
8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63393EN/02
144
3) Using DIN rail for mounting
DIN rail
DIN rail
How to mount
1. Place the hook of the unit on the top end of the DIN rail2. Push in the unit firmly until it clicks.
How to remove
1. Pull down the look on the unit using a flat–blade screwdriver or similar object.2. Remove the unit by pulling bottom towerd you.
CAUTIONTo prevent damage to the lock when removing the unit, be careful not to apply excessiveforce to the lock. When mounting and removing the unit, whenever possible, hold thetop and bottom edges. Do not apply force to the sides (where the are slits are located).
B–63393EN/02 8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
145
CNC
JD1B JD1A
I/O Link JD1A
JD1B JD1A
CP1 Terminal24VDC
Power Supply
Such as I/O UnitAS–i Converter
AS–i slave
AS–i cable
FANUC I/O Link
AS–i slaveAS–i power
8.8.3Connection
8.8.3.1General connectiondiagram
8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63393EN/02
146
Supply power to this unit from CNC or external resource.
24VDC stabilized power(24VDC10%)
CP1
0V
+24V
321
Select a source that meets
the external power terminal
AMP JAPAN1–178288–3 (housing)1–175218–5 (contact)
I/O Link AS–i converter External power
Recommended cable (using external power) : A02B–0124–K830 (5m)
(Crimp terminal of size M3 is available on the external power side)
It is possible to turn–on/off of AS–i power which connects with AS–icommunication cable at any time/
8.8.3.2Connecting Input powersource
8.8.3.3Power turn–on/offsequence
B–63393EN/02 8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
147
Screw for detachable terminal
AS–i cable
+:Brown
–:Blue
Two sets of ”+” terminaland ”–” terminal areconnected inside this uniteach other.
1) Strip insulator of AS–i cable, and screw to the terminal of AS–i converter.
2) Terminal of this unit is detachable, and it is possible to connect cabletaking off from unit. When you set terminal into unit again, screw bothside of terminal securely.
3) This unit have two AS–i “+” terminal and two AS–i “–” one. It is easyto separate some AS–i cables. Two sets of “+” terminal and “–”terminal are connected inside this unit each other. Please use terminalwhichever you are easy to work.
4) You must not to connect two cables into one terminal. Please connectone cable into each one terminal.
5) Connect “GND” terminal with frame ground.
8.8.3.4Connection of AS–iterminal
8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63393EN/02
148
Assign 32 byte input and 32 byte output on the I/O LinkAssign name : input OC03I, output OC03O
Input Output
X bit 7–4 bit 3–0 Y bit 7–4 bit 3–0
+0 Slave #1 input Reserved +0 Slave #1 output Reserved
+1 Slave #3 input Slave #2 input +1 Slave #3 output Slave #2 output
+2 Slave #5 input Slave #4 input +2 Slave #5 output Slave #4 output
+3 Slave #7 input Slave #6 input +3 Slave #7 output Slave #6 output
+4 Slave #9 input Slave #8 input +4 Slave #9 output Slave #8 output
+5 Slave #11 input Slave #10 input +5 Slave #11 output Slave #10 output
+6 Slave #13 input Slave #12 input +6 Slave #13 output Slave #12 output
+7 Slave #15 input Slave #14 input +7 Slave #15 output Slave #14 output
+8 Slave #17 input Slave #16 input +8 Slave #17 output Slave #16 output
+9 Slave #19 input Slave #18 input +9 Slave #19 output Slave #18 output
+10 Slave #21 input Slave #20 input +10 Slave #21 output Slave #20 output
+11 Slave #23 input Slave #22 input +11 Slave #23 output Slave #22 output
+12 Slave #25 input Slave #24 input +12 Slave #25 output Slave #24 output
+13 Slave #27 input Slave #26 input +13 Slave #27 output Slave #26 output
+14 Slave #29 input Slave #28 input +14 Slave #29 output Slave #28 output
+15 Slave #31 input Slave #30 input +15 Slave #31 output Slave #30 output
+16 AS–i Master Status(1) +16 Command Flag
+17 AS–i Master Status(2) +17 Command Code
+18 Board Status(1) +18 Command Parameters(1)
+19 Board Status(2) +19 Command Parameters(2)
+20 List of Slave(1) #1 – #7 +20 Command Parameters(3)
+21 List of Slave(2) #8 – #15 +21 Command Parameters(4)
+22 List of Slave(3) #16 – #23 +22 Reserved
+23 List of Slave(4) #24 – #31 +23 Reserved
+24 Command Status +24 Reserved
+25 Command Error Code +25 Reserved
+26 Command Reply Data(1) +26 Reserved
+27 Command Reply Data(2) +27 Reserved
+28 Command Reply Data(3) +28 Reserved
+29 Command Reply Data(4) +29 Reserved
+30 Reserved +30 Reserved
+31 Reserved +31 Reserved
8.8.4DI/DO Map on the I/OLink
B–63393EN/02 8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
149
NOTEIn the 18i–LNA, addresses for the I/O link of this unit mustbe allocated as follows:
Input: X96 to X127 (32 bytes) Assign module name:OC03I
Output: Y96 to Y127 (32 bytes) Assign module name:OC03O
Then, X+0, X+1, and X+31 in the above table indicate X96,X97, and X127, respectively. (The Y locations are indicatedin the same manner.)
signal input is assigned on from X+0 to X+15, signal output is assignedon from Y+0 to Y+15. 1 means ON state and 0 means OFF state.
Input
address bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4 bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0
Input of slave #1 ReservedX+0
IN4 IN3 IN2 IN1 Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved
Input of slave #3 Input of slave #2X+1
IN4 IN3 IN2 IN1 IN4 IN3 IN2 IN1
::
Input of slave #31 Input of slave #30X+15
IN4 IN3 IN2 IN1 IN4 IN3 IN2 IN1
Output
address bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4 bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0
Output of slave #1 ReservedY+0
OUT4 OUT3 OUT2 OUT1 Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved
Output of slave #3 Output of slave #2Y+1
OUT4 OUT3 OUT2 OUT1 OUT4 OUT3 OUT2 OUT1
::
Output of slave #31 Output of slave #30Y+15
OUT4 OUT3 OUT2 OUT1 OUT4 OUT3 OUT2 OUT1
8.8.5Details of I/O LinkDI/DO
8.8.5.1input / output data area
8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63393EN/02
150
address bit item bit status Condition of flag on
X+16 0 Off line phase status 1 : off line0 : not off line
When the off line phase is active;configuring process is executed, orAS–i power supply fail
1 AS–i power supplystatus
1 : Voltage on AS–i line is toolow
0 : normal
AS–i power supply is off or too low
2 Operation status 1 : Normal operation0 : initialize operation
normal operation mode; AS–i com-munication is possible
3 Operation mode 1 : Configuration mode0 : Protected mode
configuration mode
4 Status of automaticaddressing
1 : possible0 : impossible
Automatic addressing can beexecuted.(protected mode, automatic addres-sing is enabled and exactly oneslave is currently out of operation)
5 Reserved
6 Connection of slavewith address 0
1 : connected0 : not connected
Slave with address 0 is connected.
7 Configuration matchstatus
1 : match0 : mismatch
Current configuration is same asconfigured(desired) configuration
X+17 0 Off line operationstatus
1 : off line0 : not off line
1 Reserved
2 EEPROM status 1 : normal0 : failure
internal EEPROM of AS–i masteris OK
3 Automatic addressingenable status
1 : enabled0 : not enabled
Automatic addressing is enabled
4–7 Reserved
address bit item bit status
X+18 0 AS–i data ready 1 : DI/DO data is valid 0 : DI/DO data is invalid
1 Error status 1 : Error is occurred 0 : normal
2 AS–i master fail 1 : AS–i master fail 0 : normal
3 ROM fail 1 : ROM fail 0 : normal
4 RAM fail 1 : RAM fail 0 : normal
5 Watch Dog Alarm 1 : Watch Dog Alarm 0 : normal
6 Reserved
7 Reserved
X+19 0–3 Software edition
4–7 Hardware edition
8.8.5.2AS–i status
B–63393EN/02 8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
151
Output signals on the list of slave area (address X+20 – X+23) is changedaccording to the list output mode setting parameter (Y+16 bit 6 and bit 7)
address bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4 bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0
X+20 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 Reserved
X+21 #15 #14 #13 #12 #11 #10 #9 #8
X+22 #23 #22 #21 #20 #19 #18 #17 #16
X+23 #31 #30 #29 #28 #27 #26 #25 #24
mode 0 : List of discrepancies between LPS(List of configured slaves)and LES(List of detected slaves)1 : There is a discrepancies between LPS and LES.0 : There is no discrepancies between LPS and LES.
mode 1 : LES(List of detected slaves)1 : detected slave0 : not detected slave
mode 2 : LAS(List of activated slaves)1 : activated slave0 : not activated slave
mode 3 : LPS(List of configured slaves)1 : configurred slave0 : not configurred slave
If you want to see which slave is connected, check LES (mode 1).If you want to see which slave is configured, check LPS (mode 2).Normally, you had better set the list output mode to 0. When the operationmode is the protected mode and the configuration mismatch error isoccurred, the list of discrepancies between LPS and LES indicates theaddress number of the mismatch slave.
NOTEWhen the list output mode setting is changed, it takes threeseconds maximum until the list output is changed. If youread the list by the ladder program, be sure to confirm thelist output mode status before reading the list of slaves.
8.8.5.3List of slave
8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63393EN/02
152
It can be done that reading and writing the parameters of the AS–i slaveunit, changing the address, reading I/O configuration and ID code fromthe ladder program.
Command code(HEX)
Commnad Parameters bytelength
reply data bytelength
0AH Writing the parameter value of the specified slave to EEPROM of AS–i master
2 0
0BH Reading the parameter value of the specified slave fromEEPROM of AS–i master
1 1
0CH Writing the parameter value to the slave 2 1
0DH Reading the parameter value from the slave 1 1
12H Reading I/O configuration and ID code from the slave 1 2
17H Change the address of the specified slave 2 0
DO (ladder program –> converter)
address name contents
Y+16 Command flag Command execution request flag, list output modesetting
Y+17 Command code Command code
Y+18 Command parameters 1 Parameters if it exists
Y+19 Command parameters 2 Parameters if it exists
Y+20 Command parameters 3 Parameters if it exists
Y+21 Command parameters 4 Parameters if it exists
DI (converter –> ladder program)
address name contents
X+24 Command status End flag, list output mode status
X+25 Command error status Error code of the executed command
X+26 Command reply data 1 Reply data if it exists
X+27 Command reply data 2 Reply data if it exists
X+28 Command reply data 3 Reply data if it exists
X+29 Command reply data 4 Reply data if it exists
8.8.6Command Executionby the Ladder Program
8.8.6.1Commands that can beexecuted from the ladderprogram
8.8.6.2Command interface ofladder program
B–63393EN/02 8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
153
address bit contents
Y+16 0 Request Flag 1 : Command is requested
1 Reserved
2 Reserved
3 Reserved
4 Reserved
5 Reserved
6 list output mode setting
700 : discrepancies between LPS and LES 01 : LES 10 : LAS 11 : LPS
X+24 0 End Flag 1 : End of command
1 Error Flag 1 : Command error (refer to error code)
2 Reserved
3 Reserved
4 Reserved
5 Reserved
6 list output mode status
700 : discrepancies between LPS and LES 01 : LES 10 : LAS 11 : LPS
error code(HEX) meaning
00H Command normal termination
02H slave address error
03H Specified slave is not active. (not exist in LAS)
04H slave with address 0 exits
05H AS–i communication error
06H EEPROM error
07H Command or parameter error
08H impossible command
09H Command error (command code error)
8.8.6.3Details of command flagand status
8.8.6.4Error code
8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63393EN/02
154
Execution of command
Command code
Command parameter
Request flag
End flag
Error status
Response data
(1)Application side : Check that request flag and end flag keep off, thenwrite command code. If necessary, parameter data should be writtenat same time. Then set the request flag turned on. It does not matter thatthe writing of command code and turning on of request flag areoperated at the same scan.
(2)Converter side : If request flag turn on, the converter reads the contentsof command and operates it. After operation of command, convertersends on error status and receive data, makes end flag turned on.
(3)Application side : Wait till end flag turn on. After turn on, read the errorstatus. If no error occurred and response data is included, read it. Afteroperation, make request flag turned off.
(4)Converter side : After request flag turned off, the converter makes endflag turned off.
(1)A parameter value for the specified AS–i slave is transferred toEEPROM of AS–i converter.
address bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0
Set data Y+17 0AH
Y+18 Slave address (01H to 1FH)
Y+19 0 Parameter
Y+20 to Y+21 none
Response data X+25 Error code
A parameter value that is written in EEPROM is not transferred to thespecified AS–i slave at execution of command. It is transferred at nextpower on.
8.8.6.5An order of commandhandshake
8.8.6.6Details of commands
B–63393EN/02 8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
155
(2)A specified slave parameter value on the EEPROM of AS–i converteris read.
address bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0
Set data Y+17 0BH
Y+18 Slave address (01H to 1FH)
Y+19 to Y+21 none
Response data X+25 Error code
X+26 0 Parameter
(3)A parameter value is transferred to the specified AS–i slave
address bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0
Set data Y+17 0CH
Y+18 Slave address (01H to 1FH)
Y+19 0 Parameter
Y+20 to Y+21 none
Response data X+25 Error code
X+26 0 Parameter
A parameter value is transferred to the specified AS–i slave at executionof command. However this value is disappeared when AS–i converter isturned off, because this value is not stored on EEPROM of AS–iconverter.(4)A parameter value is read from the specified AS–i slave
address bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0
Set data Y+17 0DH
Y+18 Slave address (01H to 1FH)
Y+19 to Y+21 none
Response data X+25 Error code
X+26 0 Parameter
(5)Read actual I/O configuration data and actual ID codes of an addressedslave detected on the AS–i.
address bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0
Set data Y+17 12H
Y+18 Slave address (01H to 1FH)
Y+19 to Y+21 none
Response data X+25 Error code
X+26 0 ID code
0 I/O configuration
(6)Change slave address
address bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0
Set data Y+17 0CH
Y+18 Old slave address (01H to 1FH)
Y+19 New slave address (01H to 1FH)
Y+20 to Y+21 none
Response data X+25 Error code
8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63393EN/02
156
If an AS–i slave with address 0 is connected, this command cannot beexecuted.
(3) Setting switch
(2) 7 segment LED
(1)LED
(4) AS–i terminal
8.8.7LED Display andSetting SwitchOperation
B–63393EN/02 8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
157
name color meaning
Unit POW Green Power supply to the unit is on.
ERR Red Unit Error (refer to the other LED, 7 segments LED display or status onthe I/O Link about details of error)
I/O Link RDY Green I/O Link Ready (I/O Link communication available)
ALM Red I/O Link Alarm (refer to the 7 segments LED display)
AS–i AUP Green AUtomatic address Programming availableThe LED lit when the operation mode is the protected mode and auto-matic addressing is enabled.
CM Green LED lit: Configuration ModeLED off: Protected Mode
APF Red AS–i Power supply Fail
CER Red Configuration ERrorThe LED is lit when the slave configuration detected on the AS–i cabledeviates from the configured configuration. (LPS¤ ID code¤ or I/O con-figuration is deviated)
LED display meaning
no display Normal operation
E0 AS–i master error
E1 AS–i master EEPROM error
E2 ROM error
E3 RAM error
E5 Command execution error, SET switch execution error
E6 I/O Link slave Watch Dog Alarm
E7 I/O Link RAM error
E8 Watch Dog Alarm1
E9. or “.”(dot) Watch Dog Alarm2
00 – 31 Slave address display (refer to the table below)
88 Initialize operation, mode shifting, AS–i power supply fail
operation mode normal operation When the setting switch DISP is pressed.
configuration mode no display Display every attached slave units at about one second inter-val. (LES display)
protected mode The smallest addressnumber from configurationmismatch slaves is dis-played.
Display every configuration mismatch slave at about one se-cond interval. (display the list of discrepancies between LPSand LES)note: nothing is displayed when there is no configuration mis-match slave.
8.8.7.1LED display
8.8.7.27 segments LED display
8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63393EN/02
158
Setting switch Operation mode
Configuration mode Protected mode
DISP Display the address number of the slave units(Next input of the setting switch is not accepted until the display of every slave is finished.)
Display every attached slave units at about onesecond interval. (disply LES)
Display every configuration mismatch slave atabout one second interval. (display the list ofdiscrepancies between LPS and LES)note: nothing is displayed when there is no con-figuration mismatch slave.
SET Change the operation modenote: The mode is not changed continuously, even if the SET switch is keep pressing. Be sure toturn off the switch longer than one second.
When the SET switch is pressed for more than 5seconds, current slave configuration (LPS, IDcode, I/O configuration, Parameter) is config-ured, automatic addressing is enabled, and themode is changed to the protected mode. (note1)
When the SET switch is pressed for less than 5seconds, the mode is changed to the protectedmode without configuring. Also the automaticaddressing is not available. (note 2)
When the SET switch is pressed for more than 5seconds, the mode is changed to the configura-tion mode.
When the SET switch is pressed for less than 5seconds, the mode is not changed.
NOTEIt can not be configured when the slave with address “0” isattached. Also the mode can not be changed to theprotected mode. Alarm “E5” is displayed on the 7 segmentsLED.
8.8.7.3Setting switch
B–63393EN/02 8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
159
Check error status on the LED display or on the I/O Link.
alarm or LED indicator status signal on I/O Link Possible cause, dealing with errorswarning LED 7 seg-
ments LEDERRX+18 bit 1
AS–idata
readyX+18bit 0
else
normaloperation
– off 0 1 – –
configurationmismatch
CER lit (note 1) 0 1 X+16bit7=0
Current configuration does not match config-ured configuration.When the protected mode, use the DISPswitch to check the mismatch slave address.The possible cause are slave unit failure, dis-connection of AS–i cable, communication er-ror caused by the noise.
duringinitialization,changingmode
– 88 0 0 X+16bit0=1
or X+17bit0=1
–
AS–i powersupply fail
APF lit 88 1 0 X+16bit1=1
Check the AS–i power supply and AS–icable.This status is restored when the AS–i poweris normal.
AS–i masterinternalEEPROMfail
ERR lit E1 1 0 X+17bit2=0
Turn on the power again. Because the con-figuration may be failed, set to configureagain. If the alarm is occurred again, replacethe converter unit.
AS–i masterfail
ERR lit E0 1 0 X+18bit2=1
Turn on the power again. If the alarm is oc-curred again, replace the converter unit
ROM fail ERR lit E2 1 0 X+18bit3=1
Replace the converter unit.
RAM fail ERR lit E3 1 0 X+18bit4=1
Replace the converter unit.
Watch Dogalarm 1
ERR lit E8 1 0 X+18bit5=1
Replace the converter unit.
Watch DogAlarm 2
ERR lit E9 or”.(dot)”
1 0 – I/O Link system alarm is occurred on the hostCNC.Replace the converter unit.
I/O Link slave watchdog
ERR lit E6 – – – I/O Link system alarm is occurred on the hostCNC.This error is occurred when the power of theother I/O Link slave unit is off, or the discon-nection of I/O Link cables.It may be communication error caused bynoise.
I/O LinkRAM fail
ERR lit E7 – – – I/O Link system alarm is occurred on the hostCNC.Replace the converter unit.
8.8.8Dealing with Errors
8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63393EN/02
160
NOTE1 When the protected mode, the smallest address number
from configuration mismatch slaves is displayed. When theconfiguration mode, nothing is displayed.
2 The alarm of the converter unit should be watched anddisplay by the ladder program.
3 When the ERR LED is lit (the alarm of converter unit isoccurred), DO is off and DI is also off.
4 When the AS–i communication is failed, watch dog alarm isoccurred on the slave unit. Please refer to the manual ofslave units about the behavior of output when the slavewatch dog alarm is occured. The behavior of output signalis according to the type of slave unit or parameter value.
B–63393EN/02 8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
161
NO
Mount the I/O Link–AS–i Converter, AS–i
power supply and AS–i slave unit
Start
Set the address of AS–i slave unit
Connect AS–i cable
Turn on the power of I/O Link–AS–i Converter
and AS–i power supply
Configuration mode?
Press the SET switch more than 5 seconds
to change to the configuration mode.
Press the DISP switch and check the address
number of currently connected slaves.
Press the SET switch more than 5 seconds to
change to the protected mode.
End
YESmode LED
“CM”configuration lit
protected off
These operations can be done when
the I/O Link is not connected. (In
other words, even if the power of I/O
Link –AS–i Converter is turned on
and the power of CNC is turned off,
these setting operation can be done.)
NOTE1 When the mode is changed to the protected mode, slave
configuration is configured and automatic addressing isenabled.
2 Operation mode is not changed when the power of the I/OLink–AS–i Converter Unit is turned on/off. Press the SETswitch to change the operation mode.
8.8.9How to use I/O Link –AS–i Converter
8.8.9.1Installation
8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63393EN/02
162
(1)Operation modeThe operation mode should be protected mode in the normaloperation. In this protected mode, when the configuration mismatchis occurred by the cable disconnection, AS–i communication error, orthe slave unit failure, CER LED lit and the mismatch slave is displayedon 7 segments LED.
(2)Alarm observationThe alarm signal on the I/O Link (X+18: bit 1; 1 means that the alarmis occurred) should be watched by the ladder program of host CNC.When the alarm of the converter unit is occurred, let the PMC alarmoccur to inform the alarm to the maintenance person by the ladderprogram. The maintenance person can check the LED display or thestatus signal on the I/O Link (X+16–18) and deal with the error.
(3)Configuration mismatchConfiguration mismatch means that the current slave configuration isnot same as the configuration, which is configured when the operationmode is changed from the configuration mode to the protected mode.When the protected mode and the CER LED is lit, every number ofmismatch slaves is displayed successively by pressing the DISPswitch. The ladder program of host CNC should watch the configurationmismatch status (X+16:bit 7). When the mismatch is occurred, let thePMC alarm occur to inform to the maintenance person by the ladderprogram. The maintenance person can check the LED display bypressing DISP switch to know the mismatch slave number and dealwith it. The mismatch slave number can be displayed on the LCD ofthe host CNC by the ladder program.
(4)Possible cause of the configuration mismatchThe cable disconnection, the communication error, or the failure of theAS–i slave unit causes the configuration mismatch.
a) A cable disconnectionIn case of cable disconnection, all slaves after disconnection pointmay be mismatched.
b) A communication errorInstantaneous communication error may be canceled and operatednormally after the power is off. Check if the electrical connectionof the AS–i slave, the noise source near cable and slaves.
c) A slave unit failureIf the mismatch is occurred permanently after the power is turnedon again, the slave unit may be failed.When the LED AUP is lit, you can replace the slave unit withaddress 0 and this slave address is set automatically by automaticaddressing function.When the plural slave are replaced, slave address must be set byusing the Addressing Device.
d) An unconfigured AS–i slave is connected
8.8.9.2Normal operation
B–63393EN/02 8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
163
(5)AS–i data ready flag (X+18: bit 0)When the AS–i data ready flag is on, the data on the I/O Link is valid.DI signal should not be used when the AS–i data ready flag is off. Thisflag should be check by the ladder program.
(6)Abnormality detection circuitExamples of detecting AS–i abnormalities (such as a communicationabnormality and power supply abnormality) are given below. AnAS–i abnormality is detected five seconds after power–on.Abnormality flags are cleared by reset operation on the operator’spanel.
Example of a circuit for detecting a communication abnormality
X0112.1
X01
X0112.
On at all times
X01
Wait for 5 seconds
Communication abnormality flag
Communication abnormality
Normal communicationTo emergency stop circuit
X0112.1 : AS–i power supply abnormality (A voltage drops belowthe operating level because of a power supply failureor short–circuit.)
X0112.6 : Cabled unit 0 detected. (When, because of additionof a cabled unit, for example, slave No. is not set.) Initially, any slave No. is set to 0.
X0112.7 : Matching confirmation. (Turned off when a differencefrom the initial setting is generated because of disconnection or addition of a cabled unit.)
X0114.1 : Abnormality in converter unit
RST : Reset input signal on the operator’s panel
8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63393EN/02
164
NOTE1 When a communication abnormality is found, indicate it with
an indicator lamp, and turn off the operation ready signal.2 On the I/O Link, assignment of addresses starting from
X0096 to the converter unit is shown.
(7)Abnormality history circuitThe following explains how to record a history of AS–i abnormalities.The circuit shown below starts monitoring the AS–i communicationand I/O Link–AS–i converter statuses five seconds after the power isturned on. In the circuit, a history of the latest ten abnormalities isstored in retaining type relays D0100 to D0179.The latest abnormality data is stored in D0100 to D0107. Each timean abnormality occurs, past abnormality data is shifted eight bytes tothe higher address. The tenth abnormality data stored in D0172 toD0179 will be erased when another abnormality occurs.
Data area in the abnormality history circuit
0112
Latest abnormalityrecord
(Latest – 1)abnormalityrecord
Status area of the I/O Link–AS–i converter
I/O Link–AS–i converter alarm
Slave 0 present
Slave configuration mismatch
Operation mode1 = protection2 = Configuration
Normal operation
AS–i power supply voltage drop
10 abnormalities are recorded.(Old data is shifted automatically.)
X0116 to X0119 : Difference between planned slave and detected slave(1 indicates an abnormal slave.)
B–63393EN/02 8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
165
NOTE1 On the I/O Link, assignment of addresses starting from
X0096 to the converter unit is shown.2 The planned slave is a set cabled unit.3 The detected slave is an actually connected cabled unit.
8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63393EN/02
166
Abnormality history circuit example
On at all times
Wait for 5 seconds
Abnormality of mismatch
Mismatch ON
Read abnormality data.
Mismatch
AS–i power supplyabnormality
Shift abnormality data tohigher address.
Copy latest abnormalitydata to D0100.
B–63393EN/02 8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
167
NOTE1 On the I/O Link, assignment of addresses starting from
X0096 to the converter unit is shown.2 For D0010, D0100 to D0179, and R0010, use unused
addresses.
I/O Link–AS–i converter is applied to CE marking.
Because I/O Link–AS–i converter is based on European Standard aboutAS–i (EN50295), this unit is not tested for surge immunity.
8.8.10CE Marking
9. EMERGENCY STOP SIGNAL B–63393EN/02
168
9 EMERGENCY STOP SIGNAL
Using the emergency stop signal effectively enables the design of safemachine tools.The emergency stop signal is provided to bring a machine tool to anemergency stop. It is input to the CNC controller, servo amplifier, andspindle amplifier. An emergency stop signal is usually generated byclosing the B contact of a pushbutton switch.When the emergency stop signal (*ESP) contact is closed, the CNCcontroller enters the emergency stop released state, such that the servo andspindle motors can be controlled and operated.When the emergency stop signal (*ESP) contact opens, the CNCcontroller is reset and enters the emergency stop state, and the servo andspindle motors are decelerated to a stop.Shutting off the servo amplifier power causes a dynamic brake to beapplied to the servo motor. Even when a dynamic brake is applied,however, a servo motor attached to a vertical axis can move under theforce of gravity. To overcome this problem, use a servo motor with abrake.While the spindle motor is running, shutting off the motor–driving powerto the spindle amplifier allows the spindle motor to continue runningunder its own inertia, which is quite dangerous. When the emergency stopsignal (*ESP) contact opens, it is necessary to confirm that the spindlemotor has been decelerated to a stop, before the spindle motor power isshut off.The FANUC control amplifier α series products are designed to satisfythe above requirements. The emergency stop signal should be input to thepower supply module (called the PSM). The PSM outputs a motor powerMCC control signal, which can be used to switch the power applied to thepower supply module on and off.The CNC controller is designed to detect overtravel by using a softwarelimit function. Normally, no hardware limit switch is required to detectovertravel. If the machine goes beyond a software limit because of a servofeedback failure, however, it is necessary to provide a stroke end limitswitch, connected so that the emergency stop signal can be used to stopthe machine.Fig. 11 shows an example showing how to use the emergency stop signalwith this CNC controller and α series control amplifier.
WARNING
B–63393EN/02 9. EMERGENCY STOP SIGNAL
169
+X –X +Y –Y +Z –Z +4 –4
Stroke end limit switch Emergencystop button
Relaypower
Release switch
Spark killer
SK
Spark killer
SK
RelayEMG
emg1
emg2
CNC control unit
+24
*ESP
+24
*ESP
MCCOFF3
MCCOFF4
α series control amplifier(PSM)
SVMSPM
L1 L2
L3
External power source
L1
L2
3φ200VAC
Circuit breaker 1 MCC AC reactor
Coil
L3
(X8.4 or X1008.4)
Fig. 9
NOTEFor the actual circuit configuration and the emergency stopunit used, observe the specifications defined by TOYOTAMOTOR CORP.
The emergency stop signal is controlled as an input signal for the CNC(X8.4 or X1008.4) and as an input to the power supply module (PSM) thatdirectly shut off the motor driving power.
Brake control atemergency stop
Emergency stop signal
9. EMERGENCY STOP SIGNAL B–63393EN/02
170
When an emergency stop is performed, brake control is performed not tocause the servo motor to fall. To do this, the servo–motor driving powermust be shut off with the brake applied. In actual operation, the followingtwo controls are required:
1) Processing of emergency stop for the CNC (X8.4 or X1008.4)
When an emergency stop is input to the CNC, the motor is decelerated,then excitation is turned off. If the brake control function shown belowis enabled, servo excitation is turned off after a time preset in the timerelapses.
The axis that controls the brake prevents the motor from falling if thebrake control function is enabled, and a timer value is set. As the timervalue, set a time required until the brake is applied, which is about 100ms to 200 ms.
Parameter setting#7
2005#6
BRKC#5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
[Data type] Bit axis
BRKC The brake control function is:
0 : Disabled.1 : Enabled.
2083 Brake control timer
Increment system : msecSetting range : 0 to 16000
2) Direct shut–off of the motor driving power
To shut off the motor driving power directly, an emergency stop signalis input to the PSM, and the AC power supplied to the servo motorthrough the PSM contact output is turned off. In this case, when brakecontrol is to be performed not to cause the servo motor to fall, the servomotor driving power must be shut off with the brake applied.Therefore, it is necessary to delay the emergency stop signal input tothe PSM for the timer value set in 1) above. For this reason, anoff–delay timer needs to be provided outside the PSM.
Brake control
B–63393EN/02 10. HIGH–SPEED SERIAL BUS (HSSB)
171
10 HIGH–SPEED SERIAL BUS (HSSB)
10. HIGH–SPEED SERIAL BUS (HSSB) B–63393EN/02
172
The high–speed serial bus (HSSB) enables the high–speed transfer oflarge amounts of data between a commercially available IBM PC orcompatible personal computer and a CNC, by connecting them via ahigh–speed optical fiber.
The use of the HSSB requires an IBM PC/AT compatible computer orFANUC intelligent terminal. The machine tool builder or end user isrequired to procure and maintain the personal computer.To enable the use of the HSSB, Windows 95 or Windows NT must havebeen installed on the personal computer.FANUC owns the copyright for the HSSB device driver.The software mentioned above and the contents of the related manualsmay not be used or reproduced in part or whole without the prior writtenpermission of FANUC.
NOTE1 IBM is a registered trademark of IBM Corp. of the US.2 Windows 95 are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corp. of
the US.3 The company and product names mentioned in this manual
are trademarks or registered trademarks of the respectivecompanies.
10.1OVERVIEW
10.2CAUTIONS
B–63393EN/02 10. HIGH–SPEED SERIAL BUS (HSSB)
173
CAUTION1 The machine tool builder or end user is required to procure
and maintain the personal computer.2 FANUC is not liable for any problems resulting from the
operation of users’ personal computers, regardless ofwhether the operations are normal or abnormal.
(1)The personal computer interface board complies with the ISAstandard. It can be used in the PC/AT and compatibles. (The CPU ofthe personal computer must be a 486 or better.
(2)The following address space is used to control the high–speed serialbus. This space cannot be used by other functions or extension boards.
16 bytes of ISA I/O space corresponding to the addresses specifiedwith the setting switch, as explained in Section 10.5.
(3)The connections between the selected personal computer and CNCcontroller should be tested before they are used for actual production.
(4)The personal computer interface boards require as below.
1ch +5V, 1A
2ch +5V, 1.5A
(1)Personal computer interface boards
The same environmental conditions as those for the installation of thepersonal computer must be satisfied.
(2)CNC interface board
The same environmental conditions as those described earlier for theinstallation of the CNC control unit must be satisfied.
10.3PERSONALCOMPUTERSPECIFICATION
10.4INSTALLATIONENVIRONMENT
10. HIGH–SPEED SERIAL BUS (HSSB) B–63393EN/02
174
WARNINGBefore starting to mount or remove a personal computerinterface board, switch off the personal computer and itsperipheral devices, and disconnect their power supplycables. Otherwise, there is a serious danger of electricshock.
(1)Set the I/O addresses before installing the board. Set I/O baseaddresses which do not overlap the I/O address areas exclusively usedby the personal computer and ISA expansion board. (See the figurebelow.)When using multiple personal computer interface boards, set the I/Obase addresses so that those addresses do not overlap each other.
(2)Remove the blank panel from the expansion slot of the personalcomputer.
(3) Insert the interface board. Ensure that it has been completely insertedinto the ISA connector.
(4)Fix the metal brackets with screws.
CAUTIONDo NOT touch the edge terminals (the contacts that engagewith a mating connector) of the interface board.
A20B–8001–0583
A20B–8001–0582
L M N
Personal computerinterface boardsNew type 2
(When viewed fromthe top of the board)
Channel A
Channel A
Channel B
The I/O base address of the interface board is LMN0h(*1). The factory settings are as follows:
A20B–8001–0583L, M, N = 0, 2, 8 for channel A (COP7A)
A20B–8001–0582L, M, N = 0, 2, 8 for channel A (COP7A)L, M, N = 0, 2, 9 for channel B (COP7B)
*1 When the base address is LMN0h, LMN0h to LMNFh are used.
I/O base address setting(for personal computer interface board of new type 2 (A20–B–8100–0582, –0583))
10.5PROCEDURE FORINSTALLINGPERSONALCOMPUTERINTERFACE BOARDS
B–63393EN/02 10. HIGH–SPEED SERIAL BUS (HSSB)
175
(1)Personal computer interface board
(A) Electrostatic interferenceThe personal computer interface board is shipped in an anti–staticbag. To store or transport the interface board, always place it inthe anti–static bag. Before removing the interface board from theanti–static bag, ground your body.
(B) Protection of card edge terminalsWhen handling the personal computer interface board, do NOTtouch its card edge terminals (the gold–plated contacts whichengage with a mating connector). If you accidentally touch anycard edge terminal, wipe it gently with clean or ethylalcohol–dipped tissue paper or absorbent cotton. Do not use anyorganic solvent other than ethyl alcohol.
(2)Optical connector and cableSee Appendix D.
CNC interface cardOptical cable
Personal computerinterface card
COP7 COP7
Compatible cables (optical cables, used for interconnections)A66L–6001–0026#L
For an explanation of the cable length and other related information, seeAppendix D.
NOTEAn optical cable of up to 100 m can be used only when theNC side interface board A02B–0236–J202 (printed circuitboard drawing number: A20B–8001–0641) is used with thepersonal computer interface board (A20B–8001–0582 or–0583).
10.6HANDLINGPRECAUTIONS
10.7RECOMMENDEDCABLES
11. PLC INTERFACE BOARD B–63393EN/02
176
11 PLC INTERFACE BOARD
B–63393EN/02 11. PLC INTERFACE BOARD
177
The PLC interface board is an optional board having an interface forinstalling a PLC supplied by a PLC manufacturer. After installing a PLC,install the PLC interface board in option slot 2 of the three–slot controlunit of the Series 18i–LNA.On the PLC interface board, a CNC I/O connector is also provided towhich signals such as the emergency stop signal and skip signal areconnected.For the functions of the I/O signals, refer to the Connection Manual(Function) (B–63393EN–1).For the connection of a PLC, refer to the relevant manual supplied by thePLC manufacturer.
11.1OVERVIEW
11. PLC INTERFACE BOARD B–63393EN/02
178
Function Abbreviation Connector Number ConnectorNo. of pins specification
Input/output 1 DI/DO C80 20 MRH–20FA
Input/output 2 DI/DO C81 20 MRH–20MA
Position
11.2PLC BOARDCONNECTORLAYOUT
B–63393EN/02 11. PLC INTERFACE BOARD
179
1) Pin assignment
a) I/O–1: C80 (MR20RFA)
01 RCHA
02 RCHHGA
03 *IT4
04 SVF4
05 COM1
06 +24E
07 +24E
08 0V
09 COM2
10 EUCLPB
11 ECLPB
12 (Unused)
13 (Unused)
14 RCHPA
15 MOVE4
16 UCLPB
17 CLPB
18 (Unused)
19 SPSTDT
20 0V
b) I/O–2: C81 (MR20RMA)
01 (Unused)
02 (Unused)
03 (Unused)
04 (Unused)
05
06
07
08 0V
09 HCOM2
10 (Unused)
11 (Unused)
12 PWES
13 SKIP
14 *ESP
15 (Unused)
16 SA
17 (Unused)
18
19 +24E
20 +24E
11.3CONNECTION
11. PLC INTERFACE BOARD B–63393EN/02
180
2) Signal connection (circuit inside the M–NET board/PLC board)
a) C80
Receiver
0V
RCHA(X1034.0)
RCHHGA(X1034.1)
*IT4(X1034.2)
SVF4(X1034.3)
EUCLPB(X1034.4)
ECLPB(X1034.5)
(Unused)(X1034.6)
(Unused)(X1034.7)
RCHPA(Y1034.2)
MOVE4(Y1034.3)
UCLPB(Y1034.4)
CLPB(Y1034.5)
(Unused)(Y1034.6)
SPSTDT(Y1034.7)
C80–01
C80–02
C80–03
C80–04
C80–05
C80–10
C80–11
C80–12
C80–13
C80–09
C80–14
C80–15
C80–16
C80–17
C80–18
C80–19
C80–06, 07
C80–08, 20
+24E
+0V
COM1
COM2
RR
RR
RR
RR
Receiver
Receiver
Receiver
Receiver
Receiver
Receiver
Receiver
B–63393EN/02 11. PLC INTERFACE BOARD
181
NOTE1 COM1 is a pin for setting a common voltage for input signals
X1034.0 to X1034.3. COM2 is a pin for setting a commonvoltage for input signals X1034.4 to X1034.7.When COM1 or COM2 is connected to 0 V, the commonvoltage for the input signals is +24 V. In this case, connectthe +24 V power supply to the opposite side of the contact.If the contact is open, logical state “0” is input. If the contactis closed, logical state “1” is input.When COM1 or COM2 is connected to +24 V, the commonvoltage is 0 V. In this case, the inversion of the logical statementioned above results.If COM1 or COM2 is open, the logical states of the inputsignals are undefined. If these input signals (X1034.0 toX1034.7) are not used, connect COM1 and COM2 to 0 V.
2 +24E is a +24–V output pin. This pin is provided for use fora common signal for the above input signals or forconnection to COM1/COM2. This pin cannot be used forother purposes.
11. PLC INTERFACE BOARD B–63393EN/02
182
b) C81
Receiver
0V
0V
(Unused)(X1004.0)
(Unused)(X1004.1)
(Unused)(X1004.2)
(Unused)(X1004.3)
PWES#2
(X1004.4)
SKIP#2
(X1004.5)
PWES(X1004.6)
SKIP(X1004.7)
*ESP(X1008.4)
*ESP#2
(X1008.5)
SA(Y1034.0)
SA#2
(Y1034.1)
+24E
0V
C81–01
C81–02
C81–03
C81–04
C81–10
C81–11
C81–12
C81–13
C81–09
C81–14
C81–15
C81–16
C81–17
C81–19, 20
C81–08
HCOM
RR
RR
RR
RR
RR
Receiver
Receiver
Receiver
Receiver
Receiver
Receiver
Receiver
Receiver
Receiver
B–63393EN/02 11. PLC INTERFACE BOARD
183
NOTE1 HCOM is a pin for setting a common voltage for input signals
X1004.0 to X1004.7. When HCOM is connected to 0 V, thecommon voltage for the input signals is +24 V. In this case,connect the +24 V power supply to the opposite side of thecontact. If the contact is open, logical state “0” is input. Ifthe contact is closed, logical state “1” is input.When HCOM is connected to +24 V, the common voltageis 0 V. In this case, the inversion of the logical statementioned above results.If HCOM is open, the logical states of the input signals areundefined. If these input signals (X1004.0 to X1004.7) arenot used, connect HCOM to 0 V.
2 *ESP (X1008.4) and *ESP#2 (X1008.5) are signals forwhich the common voltage is always set to +24. To theopposite side of the contact, connect +24 V. If the contactis open, logical state “0” is input. If the contact is closed,logical state “1” is input.
3 +24E is a +24–V output pin. This pin is provided for use fora common signal for the above input signals or forconnection to HCOM. This pin cannot be used for otherpurposes.
12. DeviceNet BOARD B–63393EN/02
184
12 DeviceNet BOARD
B–63393EN/02 12. DeviceNet BOARD
185
This chapter explains the hardware specifications of the DeviceNet boardand provides connection information.
Item Specifications
Name DeviceNet board
Drawing No. A02B–0265–K412
Function One channel of DeviceNet function
PC board drawing No. A20B–8100–0490
Communication powersupply voltage
11 to 24 VDC (Supplied from communication connector)
Current consumption Communication power supply: 50 mA maximumInternal circuit power supply: 24 VDC 10% 0.2 A
Weight 200 g
NOTE1 There are two types of DeviceNet boards: the DeviceNet
slave board and DeviceNet master board. The onlydifference between the two boards is the connectionposition of setting pin TM1 on each board.
2 The installation of the DeviceNet board in the control unitmust be performed by the machine tool builder.
12.1OVERVIEW
12.2SPECIFICATIONS
12. DeviceNet BOARD B–63393EN/02
186
When the DeviceNet board is used, the ambient temperature duringcontrol unit operation must be within the range of 0°C to 50°C. For otherenvironmental conditions, see the environmental conditions required forthe control unit.
The slave and master functions are set by the setting pin on the printedcircuit board. The master function is factory set by FANUC. When thisboard is used as a slave, the facility manufacturer must change the settingof the setting pin.The specifications of the slave and master functions are as follows:
1) Slave function
DeviceNet function: One slave station
DI/DO transfer size: 64/64 bytes
DI/DO transfer address: Allocated to the R area of the PMC(parameter setting)
2) Master function
DeviceNet function: One master station
Number of connected nodes: 32 nodes
DI/DO transfer size: 32/32 bytes per nodeMaximum DI/DO transfer size 1024/1024bytes
DI/DO transfer address: Allocated to the R area of the PMC(parameter setting)
TM1Master/slavesetting pin
Daughter board(from anothersupplier)
12.3ENVIRONMENTALCONDITIONS
12.4SLAVE AND MASTERFUNCTIONS
Setting pin TM1
B–63393EN/02 12. DeviceNet BOARD
187
TM1
MASTER SLAVE
Master functionConnect the left and center pins onthe setting pin TM1.Slave functionConnect the right and center pins onthe setting pin TM1.Factory–set by FANUCThe master function is set.
12. DeviceNet BOARD B–63393EN/02
188
DeviceNet interface: Plug–in type connector (open type)
Screw
Pin No. Signal name Color code
1 V– Black
2 CANL Blue
3 SHIELD Bare
4 CANH White
5 V+ Red
Terminal block model
MSTB2.5/5–STF–5.08 (manufactured by Phoenix Contact)This terminal block is of a type that clamps a cable.Usable cable
Solid wire : 0.2 to 2.5 mm2
Thin twisted wire : 0.2 to 2.5 mm2
AWG : 24–12
For multiple connection (up to two cables connectable)
Solid wire : 0.2 to 1 mm2
Twisted wire : 0.2 to 1.5 mm2
For products for the EU, however, connecting two cables to oneterminal is not permitted. In this case, use the twin rod terminal (0.5to 1.5 mm2) manufactured by Phoenix Contact.
AI–TWIN2x0,5–8 (0.5 mm2)AI–TWIN2x0,75–8 AI–TWIN2x0,75–10 (0.75 mm2)AI–TWIN2x1–8 AI–TWIN2x1–10 (1 mm2)AI–TWIN2x1,5–8 AI–TWIN2x1,5–12 (1.5 mm2)
12.5CONNECTION
B–63393EN/02 12. DeviceNet BOARD
189
1) The relationship between the DI/DO transfer size of the slave functionand refresh time is as follows:
DI/DO transfer size Refresh time
From 1 byte to 32 bytes 8msec
From 33 bytes to 64 bytes 16msec
Up to 32 bytes of DIs/DOs are updated every 8 ms.
NOTEThe refresh time is the time required for the control unit(CNC) to update the I/O signals allocated to the R area.(The refresh time does not mean the I/O response time ona network.)
2) The relationship between the DI/DO transfer size of the masterfunction and refresh time is as follows:
Up to 32 bytes are refreshed separately for DIs and DOs every 8ms. The DI/DO refresh time is obtained from the followingequation:
Refresh time = INT (Total signal transfer size of all nodes32)+18msec
INT: Indicates that the integer part is to be obtained.
3) Signals are allocated to the R area by setting the start address of eachof the R signals assigned to DIs/DOs and the transfer size inparameters. According to the set DI/DO size, the refresh timementioned above is determined automatically.
1) The I/O signals with fixed addresses such as the emergency stop signalthat are used by the NC must be transferred separately through the I/OLink.
2) A terminating resistor must be connected to both ends of the main line.
3) A separate power supply for communication (11 to 24 VDC, 50 mAmaximum) is required.
4) The DeviceNet slave board occupies one mini slot of the control unit.Also, the DeviceNet master board occupies one mini slot of the controlunit.
5) For information not indicated in this section, refer to the FANUCDeviceNet Board Operator’s Manual (B–63404EN) and DeviceNetSpecifications Release 2.0 issued by ODVA.
12.6REFRESH TIME
12.7CAUTIONS
12. DeviceNet BOARD B–63393EN/02
190
For attaching and detaching the DeviceNet board to and from the controlsection, use the procedures described below.
CAUTIONBefore starting DeviceNet board attachment/detachment,back up the contents of the SRAM memory of the CNC toa medium such as a memory card to protect against loss ofthe contents of the SRAM memory during operation.
1) Detaching the DeviceNet connector terminal blockThe interface connector terminal block of the DeviceNet board can bedetached without disconnecting the cables. Loosen the two screwsshown below, then pull out the terminal block toward you.
Screw Main CPU board
DeviceNet board
NOTEThe connector terminal block must be detached before themain CPU board can be detached.
2) Detaching the main CPU boardDetach the main CPU board before detaching the DeviceNetboard. For the method of detaching the main CPU board, refer to themaintenance manual.
CAUTIONThe DeviceNet board can be detached only after the mainCPU board is detached. If an attempt is made to detach theDeviceNet board before detaching the main CPU board, theDeviceNet board can interfere with the main CPU board,resulting in a damage to the boards.
3) Detaching the DeviceNet boardAfter detaching the main CPU board, detach the DeviceNet board. Forthe method of detaching the DeviceNet board, refer to the maintenancemanual.
12.8ATTACHING/DETACHINGDeviceNet BOARD
Procedure for detachingthe DeviceNet board
B–63393EN/02 12. DeviceNet BOARD
191
1) Detaching the main CPU boardBefore attaching the DeviceNet board, detach the main CPUboard. For the method of detaching the main CPU board, refer to themaintenance manual.
CAUTIONThe DeviceNet board can be attached only after the mainCPU board is detached. If an attempt is made to attach theDeviceNet board before detaching the main CPU board, theDeviceNet board can interfere with the main CPU board,resulting in a damage to the boards.
2) Detaching the DeviceNet connector terminal blockDetach the interface connector terminal block from the DeviceNetboard.Loosen the two screws shown below, then detach the terminal block.
Screw
3) Attaching the DeviceNet boardAttach the DeviceNet board when the main CPU board is notattached. For the method of attaching the DeviceNet board, refer tothe maintenance manual.
4) Attaching the main CPU boardAfter attaching the DeviceNet board, attach the main CPU board. Forthe method of attaching the main CPU board, refer to the maintenancemanual.
5) Attaching the DeviceNet connector terminal blockAttach the interface connector terminal block to the DeviceNet board.After attachment, tighten the two screws on the terminal block.
NOTEThe main CPU board can be attached only after theconnector terminal block is detached.
Attaching the DeviceNetboard
13. FL–net BOARD B–63393EN/02
192
13 FL–net BOARD
B–63393EN/02 13. FL–net BOARD
193
FL–net is the open FA network standardized by the FA open promotionconference (JOP) in Manufacturing Science and Technology Center,which is an outside organization of the Ministry of International Trade andIndustry. As shown below, many personal computers and FA controllersof different manufacturers such as programmable controllers (PLC) andCNCs are interconnected, controlled, and monitored.
Computer
Controller
Device
High–order LAN Ethernet (TCP/IP, UDP)
FL–net (Ethernet base control network)
Field network
SensorActuator
Fig. 13.1 Example of FA control network
FL–net has various features required for FA.
1) Large–scale networkUp to 254 units (nodes) can be connected.
2) Two types of communication functions suitable for applicationsFL–net supports a common memory function that allows each node toshare the same data at all times through cyclic communication, and amessage communication function that exchanges only necessaryinformation only when required.
3) Large–capacity common memoryThe common memory is as large as 8K bits + 8K words.
4) High–speed responseResponse as fast as 50 ms/32 nodes (with 2K bits + 2K words) can beachieved.
5) High reliability based on masterless methodNo master is present, so that nodes can be connected to anddisconnected from the network without affecting the communicationof other nodes. So, each node allows free power–on/off operation andmaintenance.
13.1OVERVIEW
13. FL–net BOARD B–63393EN/02
194
Item Specifications Remarks
Name FANUC FL–net board
Specifica-tion number
A02B–0265–K414 FL–net board
Function One FL–net channel
PCB draw-ing number
A20B–8100–0530
Power sup-ply capacity
0.3A 24 VDC10% (including momen-tary variations and ripples).Via the main CPU board.
Heat output 6W
Weight 150g
Environ-ment condi-tion
See Subsection 3.1.1.
NOTEThe installation of the FL–net board in the control unit mustbe performed by the machine tool builder.
13.2SPECIFICATIONS
B–63393EN/02 13. FL–net BOARD
195
Select one of the nodes connected to FL–net as a station for monitoringparticipation and separation, and use a PMC ladder to monitor, store,and display a history of participating and separated nodes on thisstation. This section will explain a concrete method using a sampleladder program.
FL–net does not impose any restriction on which node is to bespecified as the station for monitoring participation and separation.Determine a node freely considering the layout of units.
On the FL–net setting screen of the CNC determined as the station formonitoring participation and separation, assign a list of participatingnodes to the R area of the PMC. The figure shows assignment toR2000.
Bit 7
Node 7
Node 15
6
Node 6
Node 14
5
Node 5
Node 13
4
Node 4
Node 12
3
Node 3
Node 11
2
Node 2
Node 10
1
Node 1
Node 9
Bit 0
(Reserved)
Node 8
(Reserved) Node 254 Node 253 Node 252 Node 251 Node 250 Node 249 Node 248
R2001
R2031
:
Each bit indicates participation or separation of the correspondingnode. A change from 0 to 1 means participation, and a change from1 to 0 means separation.
Eight nodes are monitored per ladder scan. Therefore, all nodes aremonitored by 32 scans. If a change is detected, it is stored as historydata in the D area as well as the time at which the change was made.
One record of history data is six bytes long, consisting of a nodenumber, participation/separation flag, the day of occurrence, hour,minute, and second. The latest 10 records are stored.The records are stored so that the first record always contains the latesthistory data. As data becomes older, it is shifted, and data thatbecomes older than the 10 records is erased.The following figure shows an example in which history data is placedin D7000.
Byte 1
NodeD7000 (1st record)
2 3 4
Hour
5
Minute
Byte 6
Second Latest data
↑
↓
Old data
D7006 (2nd record)
D7054 (10th record)
Day ofParticipation/separation occurrence
A data table is used to display history data. Set data groups as follows,and switch among records by using page keys.
13.3MONITORINGPARTICIPATING ANDSEPARATED NODES
13. FL–net BOARD B–63393EN/02
196
Setting data groups
Displaying history data
←Node number (node 3)
←1: Participation, 0: Separation
←Day of occurrence (10)
←Hour (16 o’clock)
←Minute (45 minutes)
←Second (30 seconds)
NOTEEach node number is assigned to only one byte for spacesaving. On the PMC data table screen, however, nodenumbers are indicated with a sign, so node numbers 128and up are indicated as negative values. For this reason,set node numbers to values not greater than 127. If you findthis specification inconvenient, assign each node number totwo bytes.
Sample ladder programThis sample ladder program compares the previous participatingnodes and current participating nodes to monitor node participationand separation. The program monitors eight nodes per scan, andmonitors all nodes with 32 scans.
(Processing flow)
<1> From the list of the present participating nodes and the list of theprevious participating nodes, acquire one byte of information (foreight nodes).
<2> Exclusive OR the information <1> to obtain any bit that made achange.
<3> Obtain the change status (participation or separation) and bit numberof the bit that made a change in <2>.
<4> Shift the history to allocate a new history area.
<5> Set the node number, participation/separation flag, day ofoccurrence, hour, minute, and second.
B–63393EN/02 13. FL–net BOARD
197
<6> Repeat steps <3> to <5> as necessary.
<7> Update the table index for the next scan.
D7000
D7006
D7060
<4>
WINDR instruction
<5>
R2230.0
R2231
Obtain change status
Obtain bit number
P1910P1917
P1920
R2000[0]
[31]
R2100
R2132
[0]
[31]
n]
Comparison register 1
Difference bit register
R2221
R2220
R2222
Table indexR2212
EOR
Previous participatingnodes
Current participating nodes
<7>Update index (+1)
0 0 0 0 1 0 11
0 0 00 1 1 11
0 0 0 0 0 1 00
<1>
<1>
<2>
0 to
P1900
R2032
Comparison register 2
n]
<3>
To increase history items, change the copy size of the second net of P1920.An area for this must also be allocated.
R9091.1 ACTSUB45MOVN
0054
D7000HISNOD
D7006LASHIS
When changing the number ofhistory items to 20(20–1) x 6 = 114Change 54 to 114.
13. FL–net BOARD B–63393EN/02
198
Sample ladder program
FL–net ready
FL–net monitor
Ladder diagram
B–63393EN/02 13. FL–net BOARD
199
Ladder diagram
13. FL–net BOARD B–63393EN/02
200
Ladder diagram
B–63393EN/02 13. FL–net BOARD
201
Ladder diagram
Set status of bit 0
Change status (participation: 1/separation: 0)
Set status of bit 1
Change status (participation: 1/separation: 0)
13. FL–net BOARD B–63393EN/02
202
Ladder diagram
Change status (participation: 1/separation: 0)
Set status of bit 3
Set status of bit 2
Change status (participation: 1/separation: 0)
B–63393EN/02 13. FL–net BOARD
203
Ladder diagram
Set status of bit 4
Change status (participation: 1/separation: 0)
Set status of bit 5
Change status (participation: 1/separation: 0)
13. FL–net BOARD B–63393EN/02
204
Ladder diagram
Set status of bit 6
Change status (participation: 1/separation: 0)
Set status of bit 7
Change status (participation: 1/separation: 0)
B–63393EN/02 13. FL–net BOARD
205
Ladder diagram
Set history
13. FL–net BOARD B–63393EN/02
206
Ladder diagram
B–63393EN/02 13. FL–net BOARD
207
Ladder diagram
13. FL–net BOARD B–63393EN/02
208
Ladder diagram
B–63393EN/02 13. FL–net BOARD
209
1) The FL–net interface is 10Base–T.
2) For details, refer to “FANUC FL–net Board Operator’s Manual(B–63434EN) ” to be issued separately.
13.4MISCELLANEOUS
14. M–NET BOARD B–63393EN/02
210
14 M–NET BOARD
B–63393EN/02 14. M–NET BOARD
211
The M–NET board is the interface board used to connect the Series18–LNA with the PLC via the M–NET.
Item Specifications Remarks
Name FANUC M–NET board
Specifica-tion number
A02B–0265–K415 M–NET board
Function One M–NET channel
PCB draw-ing number
A20B–8100–0350
Power sup-ply capacity
0.3A 24 VDC10% (including momen-tary variations and ripples).Via the main board.
Heat output 6W
Weight 150g
Environ-ment condi-tion
See Subsection 3.1.1.
NOTEThe installation of the M–NET board in the control unit mustbe performed by the machine tool builder.
14.1OVERVIEW
14.2SPECIFICATIONS
14. M–NET BOARD B–63393EN/02
212
Terminal block
M–NET interface
Jumper pin ST1Short–circuit: 240 W terminat-ing resistorOpen: No terminating resistor
Terminal block model
MSTB2.5/5–STF–5.08 (manufactured by Phoenix Contact)This terminal block is of a type that clamps a cable.Usable cable
Solid wire : 0.25 to 2.5 mm2
Thin twisted wire : 0.25 to 2.5 mm2
AWG : 24–12
For multiple connection (up to two cables connectable)
Solid wire : 0.2 to 1 mm2
Twisted wire : 0.2 to 1.5 mm2
For products for the EU, however, connecting two cables to oneterminal is not permitted. In this case, use the twin rod terminal (0.5to 1.5 mm2) manufactured by Phoenix Contact.
AI–TWIN2x0,5–8 (0.5 mm2)AI–TWIN2x0,75–8 AI–TWIN2x0,75–10 (0.75 mm2)AI–TWIN2x1–8 AI–TWIN2x1–10 (1 mm2)AI–TWIN2x1,5–8 AI–TWIN2x1,5–12 (1.5 mm2)
Perform line termination with the jumper pin ST1 shown in the figure.
14.3INTERFACECONNECTOR
B–63393EN/02 14. M–NET BOARD
213
The figure below show an example of cable connection.
M–NET board
Series 18i–LNA
14.4CABLECONNECTION
APPENDIX
B–63393EN/02A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
AND CONNECTOR
217
A EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT AND CONNECTOR
Series 18i–LNA control unit A02B–0266–B501, B506 Fig. U1
10.4″ LCD unit A02B–0265–C087 Fig. U2
Detachable LCD/MDI(with touch panel and operator’s panel I/O)
A02B–0166–C291#R Fig. U3
HSSB interface board type 2 (1CH) on the personalcomputer side
A02B–8001–0583 Fig. U4
HSSB interface board type 2 (2CH) on the personalcomputer side
A02B–8001–0582
Manual pulse generator A860–0202– T001 Fig. U5
Pendant manual pulse generator A860–0202– T004 to T015 Fig. U6
Punch panel (narrow type) 1 m A02B–0120–C191 Fig. U7
2 m A02B–0120–C192
5 m A02B–0120–C193
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNITAND CONNECTOR B–63393EN/02
218
172 (for 3–slot type)
60 (for 1–slot type)
Slot 1
Slot 3 Slot 2
Memory card
Weight: For 1–slot type, 0.7 kgFor 3–slot type, 1.9 kg
For both types, the stated weight doesnot include printed–circuit boards in-serted in the slots.
Fig. U1 Series 18i–LNA control unit
B–63393EN/02A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
AND CONNECTOR
219
4–M3
4–4290
2805 5
220
521
05
Mounting hole layout diagram(The unit shall be fastened to the cabinet from the outside.)Painting shall be masked 8 mm from the edges of the panel sheet metalon the rear surface.
Paint color: Munsell code N3, medium glossWeight: 2.5 kg
Fig. U2 10.4″ LCD Unit (with touch panel and operator’s panel I/O)
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNITAND CONNECTOR B–63393EN/02
220
weight: 3.5kg
Fig. U3 Detachable LCD/MDI
B–63393EN/02A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
AND CONNECTOR
221
–0582 –0583
Weight: 0.2 kg
Fig. U4 High–speed serial bus interface board type 2 (PC)Specification No.: A20B–8001–0583 (1 CH)
A20B–8001–0582 (2 CH)
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNITAND CONNECTOR B–63393EN/02
222
8.35
80.055.0
60.0
50.0
30.0
M4X
8.0
5V0V A B
11.0PULSE GENERATOR
FANUC LTD
120.0°
On the 72 circumference
M3 screw terminal
Fig. U5 External dimensions of manual pulse generatorSpecification No.: A860–0202–T001
B–63393EN/02A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
AND CONNECTOR
223
140
25
90 38.0
39.0
100.
0
A860–0202–T004 to T009
140
25
90 38.0
39.0
100.
0
A860–0202–T010 to T015
M3 screw terminal
M3 screw terminal
M3 screw terminal
M3 screw terminal
Fig. U6 External dimensions of pendant–type manual pulse generator Specification No.: A860–0202–T004 to TT015
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNITAND CONNECTOR B–63393EN/02
224
Painting shall be masked 8 mm from the edges of the panelsheet metal on the rear surface.
The following is the panel cut layout drawing of this punch panel.
20
2–M3
100
115
Fig. U7 Punch Panel (Narrow Type)Specification No.: A02B–0120–C191 (cable length 1 m)
A02B–0120–C192 (cable length 2 m)A02B–0120–C193 (cable length 5 m)
B–63393EN/02A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
AND CONNECTOR
225
Fig. title Specification No. Fig. No.
PCR connector (soldering type) PCR–E20FS Fig.C1 (a)
FI40 connector FI40–2015S Fig.C1 (b)
Connector case (HONDA PCR type) PCR–V20LA/PCR–V20LB Fig.C2 (a)
Connector case (HIROSE FI type) FI–20–CV Fig.C2 (b)
Connector case (FUJITSU FCN type) FCN–240C20–Y/S Fig.C2 (c)
Connector case (HIROSE PCR type) FI–20–CV7 Fig.C2 (d)
AMP connector (1) for servo side AMP1–178128–3 Fig.C3 (a)
AMP connector (2) for servo side AMP2–178128–3 Fig.C3 (b)
AMP connector (3) for +24 V power supply AMP1–178288–3 Fig.C3 (c)
AMP connector (4) for +24 V power supply AMP2–178288–3 Fig.C3 (d)
Contact for AMP connector AMP1–175218–2/5AMP1–175196–2/5
Fig.C3 (e)
HONDA connector (case) Fig.C4 (a)
HONDA connector (angled case) Fig.C4 (b)
HONDA connector (male) Fig.C4 (c)
HONDA connector (female) Fig.C4 (d)
HONDA connector (terminal layout) Fig.C4 (e)
Connector (FCI Japan)(3 pins/brown) SMS3PN–5 Fig.C5
Connector for HIROSE flat cable HIF3BB–50D–2.54RHIT3BB–34D–2.54R
Fig.C6
Connector (Japan Aviation Electronics)(for MDI) LY10–DC20 Fig.C7 (a)
Contact (Japan Aviation Electronics)(for MDI) LY10–C2–3 Fig.C7 (b)
Punch panel connector for reader/punch interface Fig.C8 (a)
Locking plate for reader/punch interface connector Fig.C8 (b)
Honda connector (for distribution I/O connection printed circuit board) MRH–50FD Fig. C9
Faston terminal A02B–0166–K330 Fig. C10
Connectors
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNITAND CONNECTOR B–63393EN/02
226
HONDA
1.27
A
1
7.3
n n2 1
7
15.1
B1.27
Display
n2
TYPE : HONDA PCR–E20FS (SOLDERING TYPE)
USAGE : GENERAL
MATING
HOUSING : HONDA PCR–E20L (PLASTIC)
PCR–E20FS
A
21.65
B
11.43
Fig. C1 (a) PCR connector (soldering type)
B–63393EN/02A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
AND CONNECTOR
227
16.2511.43
1.27
13.3519.2
15
5.5
2.2
1.7
9.2
12345678910
11121314151617181920
S
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1214161820Section AA
1.8
3
5
8.5
4.3
7
A A2.4 2.4
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
NoteThis connector does nothave contacts for positions11,13,15,17, and 19.
Tab forshieldconnection
TYPE : HIROSE FI40–2015S
USAGE : PULSE CODER INTERFACE
LINEAR SCALE INTERFACE
MPG INTERFACE
MATING/HOUSING : HIROSE FI–20–CV
(Standard 1/10)
See from the back (soldering side)
Fig. C1 (b) FI40 connector
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNITAND CONNECTOR B–63393EN/02
228
9.5
HONDA
21
30
37
11.4
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(1) (2) Case(3) Cable clamp(4) Lock bracket(5) Lock lever(6) Set screw for cable clamp
TYPE : HONDA PCR–V20LA (for 6 dia. cable)
USAGE : GENERAL
Fig. C2 (a) Connector case (HONDA PCR type)
B–63393EN/02A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
AND CONNECTOR
229
(1)(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
21±0.311.5±0.3
TYPE : HIROSE FI–20–CV
USAGE : PULSE CODER INTERFACE
LINEAR SCALE INTERFACE
MANUAL PULSE GENERATOR INTERFACE
(1) (2) Case(3) Lock bracket(4) Lock lever(5) Cable clamp(6) Set screw for cable clamp
9.5±0.2
30±0.3
37
0.5
17.5
0.3
Fig. C2 (b) Connector case (HIROSE FI type)
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNITAND CONNECTOR B–63393EN/02
230
21
30
37
11.4
(2)
FC020–02
9.5
Cable clampScrew
Lock lever
TYPE : FUJITSU FCN–240C20–Y/S (for 5.8 dia. cable)
USAGE : GENERAL
Fig. C2 (c) Connector case (FUJITSU FCN type)
B–63393EN/02A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
AND CONNECTOR
231
TYPE : FI–20–CV7
USAGE : GENERAL(Cannot be used on the main CPU board or the sub–CPU board of the Series 18i–LNA.)
Fig. C2 (d) Connector case (PCR type (Hirose Electric))
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNITAND CONNECTOR B–63393EN/02
232
3 12
AMP
19.24
16.3 22
.8X
10.165.08
4.05
3.1
123
Circuit No.
0.6
6.55
7.15
Circuit No.
TYPE : AMP1–178128–3
(25.5)
D–3
DIMENSION
Fig. C3 (a) AMP connector (1)
B–63393EN/02A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
AND CONNECTOR
233
TYPE : AMP2–178128–3
DIMENSION
3 12
AMP
(29.7)
(19.24)
16.3 22
.8
Y
10.165.08
4.05
3.1
123
Cricuit No.
0.6
6.55
7.15
Circuit No.
0.
3
0.
3
D–3
0.
3
0.
3
0.
3
Fig. C3 (b) AMP connector (2)
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNITAND CONNECTOR B–63393EN/02
234
3 12AMP
(22.96)
16.7
16.3 22
.8X
7.623.81
4.05
3.1
123
Circuit No.
0.6
6.55
7.15
Circuit No.
TYPE : AMP1–178288–3
USAGE : POWER SUPPLY UNIT CP1A
+24V INPUT
3
2
1
0V
+24V
D–3
DIMENSION
Fig. C3 (c) AMPconnector (3)
B–63393EN/02A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
AND CONNECTOR
235
123
Circuit No.
0.6
6.55
7.15
Circuit No.
TYPE : AMP2–178288–3
USAGE : POWER CP1B
+24V OUTPUT
3
2
1
0V
+24V
DIMENSION
Fig. C3 (d) AMP connector (4)
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNITAND CONNECTOR B–63393EN/02
236
SEPARATE : AMP1–175218–2(Gold coated)AMP1–175218–5(Tin coated)
REEL : AMP1–175196–2(Gold coated)AMP1–175196–5(Tin coated)
WIRE : AWG 16, 18, 20(21.8)
3
1In case of reel
A–A2.9
2.9
4.2
5.5
B–B17.8
(9.3) (2.5)
A B
AB
(2.6)
–AMP
2.9
(1.7) 2.5
3.4
PLATING 1D–MARK
PRESSER 1D–MARK
±0.2
±0.5
±0.4
±0.4
0.
2
0.
5
0.
2
0.
5
Fig. C3 (e) Contact for AMP connector
B–63393EN/02A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
AND CONNECTOR
237
(2)
(1)
(3)
(4)
(5)
A(B)
(D)
MR–20LMH (Plug)
MR–20LFH (Jack)
MR–50LMH (Plug)
MR–50LFH (Jack)
SpecificationSymbol
A (B) C (D)Number ofterminals
39.3 44.9 39.8 17 20
67.9 73.5 44.8 18 50
Symbol1
2
3
4
5
NameConnector cover
Cable clamp
Screw for cable clamp
Plug (MR–20, 50MH)
Jack (MR–20, 50FH)
Outer diameter of the cableMR–20L dia.10mm maxMR–50L dia.16mm max
Stopper
C
Fig. C4 (a) HONDA connector (case)
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNITAND CONNECTOR B–63393EN/02
238
External dimensions of 50–pin connector
Fig. C4 (b) Honda connector (angled–type case)
B–63393EN/02A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
AND CONNECTOR
239
(2)
(1)
(3)
2–M2
A
B
13
18.1
8.5
6
2.4
HO
ND
A
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13
14 15 16 17 18 19 20
MR–20RMH
MR–50RHF
A B
32.8 27.8 20
61.4 56.4 50
Symbol1
2
3
NameCable clamp
Screw 2.6dia.×8
Connector (MR–20,–50MH)
Number ofterminals
Fig. C4 (c) HONDA connector (male)
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNITAND CONNECTOR B–63393EN/02
240
(2)
(1)
(3)
2–M2
A
B
13
19.9
10.9 8.
4
HO
ND
A
8 9 10 11 12 13
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Symbol1
2
3
NameCable clamp
Screw 2.6dia.×8
Connector ( MR–20,– 50FH)
MR–20RMH
MR–50RMH
A B
32.8 27.8 20
61.4 56.4 50
Number ofterminals
2.4
Fig. C4 (d) HONDA connector (female)
B–63393EN/02A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
AND CONNECTOR
241
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 181
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
HONDA
MR–50MH(50–core, plug)
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 181
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
HONDA
MR–50FH(50–core, jack)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13
14 15 16 17 18 19 20
HONDAMR–20MH(20–core, plug)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13
14 15 16 17 18 19 20
HONDAMR–20FH(20–core, jack)
Fig. C4 (e) HONDA connector (terminal layout)
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNITAND CONNECTOR B–63393EN/02
242
32 m
ax.
19.0
6
30
7.7
6
5.08
12
3
Specification(Connector maker
number)
Connector housing for cable
Contact(Crimp type)
(Solder type)
Name Remarks
SMS3PNS–5
RC16M–23T3
RC16M–SCT3
BrownFor details on tools required for crimpterminals,contact themanufacturer.
Manufacturer : FCI Japan Corp.
Cables : Cross sectional area : 0.75mm2(30/0.18)
Insulation diameter : 2.8mm max
Peeling length : 7.2mm
±0.2
0.
2
Fig. C5 Connector made by FCI Japan (3 pins, black)
B–63393EN/02A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
AND CONNECTOR
243
Section B–B’
1.271.27
1.27
1.09
15.6
14.4
C
3.8
2.7
7.0
1
A
A A’ B
B’2.54
3.811.27
2.54
6.0
A
6.0
D
3.5
10.5
7.0
0.3
0.95
1.05
3.5
4.5
2.3
A
D
3.6
6.0
2.33.5
8.5
MAIN BODY PROTECTOR CRAMP
ASS’Y DIAGRAMSection A–A’
HIF3BB–34D–2.54R
Description A B C D
47.75 40.64 41.91 43.23
No.ofcontact
34
Dimensions
Specification HIROSE ELEC. CO.
HIF3BB–50D–2. 54R (50contacts)
HIF3BA
HIF3BB
CONNECTOR FOR FLAT CABLE (HIROSE ELEC. CO.)
0102
0304
0506
0708
0910
ROW A
ROW B
20PINS
A01 MARK (SIDE)
POLARITY GUIDANCE
0102
0304
0506
0708
0910
1112
1314
1516
1718
1920
2122
2324
25
50PINS
ROW A
ROW B
OUTVIEW FROM CONNECTOR SIDE.
OUTVIEW FROM CONNECTOR SIDE.
FLAT CABLE CONNECTOR CONTACT NUMBER (HIROSE)
B
2
3
5.1
HIF3BB–50D–2.54R 68.07 60.96 62.23 63.650
Fig. C6 Connector for HIROSE Flat cable
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNITAND CONNECTOR B–63393EN/02
244
+0.218
±0.1513
20.50
–0.3
21.6+0.3
0
2 (pitch)
Fig. C7 (a) Connector (Japan Aviation Electronics)(for MDI)
B–63393EN/02A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
AND CONNECTOR
245
Product name
Detailed contact diagram
Excluding the crimp terminal
Contact position
Section A–A
Fig. C7 (b) Contact (Japan Aviation Electronics)(for MDI)
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNITAND CONNECTOR B–63393EN/02
246
A
BC
F
G
10
HJ
6.1
A 53.0 D 7.8 G 10.7B 38.3 E 12.6 H 1.2C 47.0 F 41.3 J 0.8
A
A
E
102–3.05
D
10
10.8
A–A cross section
Fig. C8 (a) Punch panel connector for reader/puncher interface
Interlock screwM2.6P0.45 screwSmall round head screw
1.2groove
Spring washer
6.1
1.26.2
12.7
Fig. C8 (b) Locking plate plate for reader/puncher interface connector
B–63393EN/02A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
AND CONNECTOR
247
Honda MR type, 50 pins, male, connection printed circuit board soldering type connector
Type No. Honda Tsushin Kogyo Co., Ltd.MRH–50FD
Pin configuration of Honda MR connector, 50 pins, male
Viewed from the connector side
19
Fig. C9 Honda connector
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNITAND CONNECTOR B–63393EN/02
248
Type: Faston terminal
Use: Frame grounding
Applicable housing: 170604–1 manufactured by AMP Japan, Ltd. or FVDDF2–250 TYPE I (blue) manufactured by Japan Solderless terminal MFG. co.Ltd.
Dimensions:
7.62
7.75
21.59
Applicable wire1.25 to 2.27 mm2
Fig. C10 Faston Terminal
B–63393EN/02 B. 20–PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS AND CABLES
249
B 20–PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS AND CABLES
B. 20–PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS AND CABLES B–63393EN/02
250
This section provides supplementary information about therecommended (FANUC–approved) 20–pin interface connectors usedwith the following target model.
FANUC i series(Including the Series 18i–LNA and Power Mate i–LNA)
Models: PCR–EV20MDT (Honda Tsushin)52618–2011 (Molex Japan)
These board–mounted connectors have been specially developed toachieve the high packing density required for FANUC products. Asexplained in the following subsection, Honda PCR series connectors canbe used as cable connectors because the mating mechanism of the newlydeveloped connectors is compatible with that of the Honda PCR seriesconnectors. To support this specification extensively, many connectormanufacturers are now developing custom–tailored cable connectors.(Note that these cables cannot be used with screw–fixing cable connectorhousings.)
Models: PCR–E20MDK–SL–A (Honda Tsushin)(straight connector)PCR–E20LMDETZ–SL (Honda Tsushin)(right–angled connector)
These connectors are used for the main and option boards of the i series.As cable connectors, they are compatible with screw–fixing connectorhousings as well as the spring locking connector housings.
NOTEThe screw–fixing connector housings cannot be used withthe main and sub–CPU boards of the Series 18i–LNA.
B.1OVERVIEW
B.2ADDITIONALTARGET MODEL
B.3BOARD–MOUNTEDCONNECTORS
B.3.1Vertical–typeConnectors
B.3.2Straight andRight–angledConnectors (for Springand Screw–fixingConnector Housings)
B–63393EN/02 B. 20–PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS AND CABLES
251
Cable connectors consist of a connector main body and housing. Themodels listed below are available. Those connectors not marked with anasterisk are currently being mass–produced as manufacturer’s standardmodels. Those marked with an asterisk are produced according to customspecifications by FANUC.
Strand wirepress–mount type
HondaStrand wirepress–mounttype
Cableconnector
Generaluse(MDI,IOLINK,AMP,SPDL,etc.)
PCR–E20FA PCR–V20LA* 6mm (5.7 to 6.5)
Use Type Manufacturer Connectormodel
Housingmodel
Applicable cableoutside diameter
Hirose FI30–20S* FI–20–CV2* 6.2mm (5.5 to 6.5)
Fujitsu FCN–247J020 –G/E
FCN–240C020 –Y/S*
5.8mm (5.5 to 6.5)
Molex 52622–2011* 52624–2015* 6.2mm (5.9 to 6.5)
Hirose FI30–20S* FI–20–CV7*(Low screw–fixing housing)
6.2mm (5.5 to 6.5)
Hirose FI40–20S* FI–20–CV2* 6.2mm (5.5 to 6.5)
FI40B–20S*(FI40A–20S*)
FI–20–CV5* 9.2mm (8.9 to 9.5)
FI40B–20S* FI–20–CV6* 10.25mm (9.5 to 11.0)
HiroseSolderingtype
For pulse coder,coaxialcable, linear scale,manual pulsegenerator,etc.
FI40B–2015S*(FI40–2015S*)
FI–20–CV* 8.5mm (8.0 to 9.0)
FI40B–20S*(FI40A–20S*)
FI–20–CV5* 9.2mm (8.9 to 9.5)
FI40B–20S* FI–20–CV6* 10.25mm (9.5 to 11.0)
Honda PCR–E20FS PCR–V20LA* 6mm (5.7 to 6.5)
Solderingtype
Honda PCR–E20FS PCR–V20LA* 6mm (5.7 to 6.5)
Fig. B.4 Cable connectors
NOTEThe low screw–fixing housing (FI–20–CV7, manufacturedby Hirose Electric Co., Ltd.) cannot be used with the mainCPU board and sub–CPU board of the Series 18i–LNA.
B.4CABLECONNECTORS
B. 20–PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS AND CABLES B–63393EN/02
252
Strand wire press–mount connector :With this connector, #28AWG wires arepress–connected to each pin at the same time.The cost of producing a cable/connectorassembly with this connector model is muchlower than with connectors designed forcrimping or soldering. Also, the following connector housing hasbeen newly developed for use with the iseries.
Connector model (manufacturer) Supplementary description
FI–20–CV7 (Hirose) Low connector housing, more compact than conventional models. The housingcan be fastened to a board–mounted connector by means of a screw lock. It isintended mainly for connecting the board–mounted connectors used on the mainand option boards of the LCD–mounted type i series (see Section B.3.2). Thiscannot be used in the Series 18i–LNA.
Soldering type connector : Details of soldering type connectors and theirhousings are summarized below.
Table B.4 Details of soldering type connectors and housings
Connectors
Connector model (manufacturer) Supplementary description
PCR–E20FS (Honda) Soldering type connector for general signals. This is suitable for producing cableassemblies in small quantities, as well as on–site.
FI40–20S (Hirose) Equivalent to Honda PCR–E20FS
FI40B–20S (Hirose)(formerly, FI40A–20S)
Has the same number of pins as the FI40–20S, but features a wider soldering pitch,facilitating soldering and enabling the use of thicker wires. Its reinforced pins allowwires as thick as #17AWG to be soldered to the FI40B–20S (wires no thicker than#20AWG can be used with the FI40A–20S). Note, however, that a thick wire, suchas #17AWG, should be used with a more robust housing like the FI–20–CV6.
FI40B–2015S (Hirose)(formerly, FI40–2015S)
Features a wider soldering pitch, attained by using the space provided by thinningout some pins. Also features tougher pins, compared with its predecessor, theFI40–2015S. These pins can be soldered to wires as thick as #17AWG, providedthat the cable diameter does not exceed 8.5 mm.
Housings
Housing model (manufacturer) Supplementary description
FI–20–CV5 (Hirose) Should be used with the FI40B–20S. This is a plastic housing designed for use witha cable that is 9.2 mm in diameter.
FI–20–CV6 (Hirose) Should be used with the FI40B–20S. This housing, however, can be used with athicker cable (such as 10.25 mm) than is possible with the FI–20–CV5. Itscomponents are die cast.
In addition to the combinations shown in Fig. B.4, Hirose soldering–typeconnectors can be combined with the housings listed below. Ensure thatthe diameter of the cable used with each housing satisfies therequirements of that housing.
Cable Connectors
B–63393EN/02 B. 20–PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS AND CABLES
253
Connector model
FI40B–2015S (formerly FI40–2015S)
FI40–20S
FI40B–20S (formerly FI40A–20S)
Housing model (applicable cable diameter)
FI–20–CV (8.5 mm in diameter) only
FI–20–CV2 (6.2mm)
FI–20–CV5 (9.2mm)
FI–20–CV6 (10.25mm)
Those listedon the leftcan beused.
B. 20–PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS AND CABLES B–63393EN/02
254
Table B.5 Recommended connectors, applicable housings, and cables
Connector namereferenced in the
ConnectionManual
FANUC–approvedconnector
(manufacturer)
FANUC–approvedhousing
(manufacturer)
Compatible cable (cable diameter)FANUC development
FANUC specification number
Remark
PCR–E20FAStrand
PCR–E20FA(Honda Tsushin)
PCR–V20LA(Honda Tsushin)
A66L–0001–0284#10P(6.2 mm in diameter)
Plastic housing
press–mount typeFI30–20S(Hirose Electric)
FI–20–CV2(Hirose Electric)
A66L–0001–0284#10P(6.2 mm in diameter) Plastic housing
FCN–247J020–G/E(Fujitsu Takamizawa)
FCN–240C020–Y/S(Fujitsu Takamizawa)
A66L–0001–0284#10P(6.2 mm in diameter) Plastic housing
52622–2011(Molex)
52624–2015(Molex)
Plastic housing
PCR–E20FAStrand wirepress–mount type
FI30–20S(Hirose Electric)
FI–20–CV7(Hirose Electric)
Plastic housing
PCR–E20FSSoldering type
PCR–E20FS(Honda Tsushin)
PCR–V20LA(Honda Tsushin)
Plastic housing
FI40–20S(Hirose Electric)
FI–20–CV2(Hirose Electric)
Plastic housing
FI40B–2015S(formerlyFI40–2015S)15–pin solderingtype
FI40B–2015S(formerlyFI40–2015S)(Hirose Electric)
FI–20–CV(Hirose Electric)
A66L–0001–0286 (*1)A66L–0001–0402 (*1)(8.5 mm in diameter)
Plastic housing
FI40B–20S(formerlyFI40–2015S)
FI40B–20S(formerly FI40–20S)(Hirose Electric)
FI–20–CV5(Hirose Electric)
A66L–0001–0367A66L–0001–0368(9.2 mm in diameter)
Plastic housing
soldering typeFI40B–20S(Hirose Electric)
FI–20–CV6(Hirose Electric)
A66L–0001–0403 (*1)(9.8 mm in diameter)
Metal housing
NOTE*1 Cable A66L–0001–0286 has been recommended for use as a pulse coder cable. It can be
up to 20 m long. Two cables, A66L–0001–0402 and A66L–0001–0403, have recently beendeveloped. A66L–0001–0402 and A66L–0001–0403 can be as long as 30 m and 50 m,respectively. (See Fig. 4 for detailed specifications.)Both cables have the same level of oil and bending resistance (cable, 100 mm in diameter,capable of withstanding at least 10 million bending cycles) as conventional cables, and areUL– and CSA–certified.
B.5RECOMMENDEDCONNECTORS,APPLICABLEHOUSINGS, ANDCABLES
B–63393EN/02 B. 20–PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS AND CABLES
255
Connector model referenced in the
Connection Manual
FANUC–approved connector
(manufacturer)
Wire forming tool Press–mountingtool
Remark
PCR–E20FA PCR–E20FA PCS–K2A FHPT–918A Low cost(Honda Tsushin)
JGPS–015–1/1–20JGPS–014
MFC–K1PCS–K1
(Note 1)
FHAT–918A
FI30–20S FI30–20CAT FI30–20/ID Low cost(Hirose Electric)
FI30–20CAT1 HHP–502FI30–20GP
FCN–247J020–G/S FCN–237T–T043/H FCN–237T–T109/H(Fujitsu)
FCN–237T–T044/HFCN–247T–T066/H
FCN–237T–T062/H
52622–2011 57829–5000 57830–5000 Low cost(Molex)
57823–5000 57824–5000
NOTE1 Those tools indicated by shading are available from FANUC (specification number
A02B–0120–K391).2 The tools available from each manufacturer are specifically designed for use with the
connectors manufactured by that manufacturer.
Press–mount typeconnector assemblytools and jigs
B. 20–PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS AND CABLES B–63393EN/02
256
Machine tool builders are required to manufacture or procure thematerials for the cable assemblies to be used with their products. FANUCrecommends the following materials as being suitable for interfaceconnectors. Individual machine tool builders are encouraged to contacteach cable manufacturer for themselves, as required.
Material Use FANUC specification
number
Manufacturer Remark
10–pair cable General use 0.08mm2
10–pairA66L–0001–0284#10P
Hitachi Cable, Ltd.Oki Electric Cable Co., Ltd.
12–conductorcomposite cable
Pulse coder, linear scale, manual pulsegenerator
0.5mm2
6–conductor0.18mm2
3–pair
A66L–0001–0286 Hitachi Cable, Ltd.Oki Electric Cable Co., Ltd.
20 m or less
0.75mm2
6–conductor0.18mm2
3–pair
A66L–0001–0402 Oki Electric Cable Co., Ltd. 30 m or lessUsable on movable parts
1.25mm2
6–conductor0.18mm2
3–pair
A66L–0001–0403 Oki Electric Cable Co., Ltd. 50 m or lessUsable on movable parts
5–core coaxialcable
CRT interface 5–conductorcoaxial
A66L–0001–0371 Hitachi Cable, Ltd. 50 m or less
Materials for cableassemblies
B–63393EN/02 B. 20–PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS AND CABLES
257
(a) Specifications
Item Unit Specifications
Product No. – A66L–0001–0284#10P
Manufacturer – Hitachi Cable,Ltd.Oki Electric Cable, Co.,Ltd.
Rating – 60°C 30V:UL278980°C 30V:UL80276
Material Conductor – Stranded wire of tinned annealed copper (ASTM B–286)
Insulator – Cross–linked vinyl
Shield braid – Tinned annealed copper wire
Sheath – Heat–resistant oilproof vinyl
Number of pairs Pairs 10
Conductor Size AWG 28
Structure Conductors/mm
7/0.127
Outside diameter mm 0.38
Insulator Thickness mm 0.1Thinnest portion : 0.8 (3.1mm)
Outside diameter (approx.) mm 0.58
Core style (rating) mm UL15157(80°C, 30V)
Twisted pair Outside diameter (approx.) mm 1.16
Pitch mm 20 or less
Lay – Collect the required number of twisted pairs into a cable, thenwrap binding tape around the cable. To make the cable round,apply a cable separator as required.
Lay diameter (approx.) mm 3.5
Drain wire Conductors/mm
Hitachi Cable : Not availableOki Electric Cable : Available,10/0.12
Shield braid Element wire diameter mm 0.12
Braid density % 85 or more
Sheath Color – Black
Thickness mm 1.0
Outside diameter (approx.) mm 6.2
Standard length m 200
Packing method – Bundle
Electrical Electric resistance (at 20°C) Ω/km 233 or lessperformance
Insulation resistance (at 20°C) MΩ–km 10 or less
Dielectricstrength (AC) V/min. 300
Flame resistance – Shall pass flame resistance test VW–1SC of UL standards.
10–pair cable
B. 20–PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS AND CABLES B–63393EN/02
258
(b) Cable structure
Bindingtape
Shieldbraid
Sheath
Twistedpair wire
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Wire identification table (Hitachi)
Wire No.
Insulator color
First wire
Secondwire
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
10
9
Blue
Yellow
Green
Red
Purple
Blue
Yellow
Green
Red
Purple
White
Brown
The numbers assigned to the wires correspond to the numbers in the table at right.
White
White
White
White
Brown
Brown
Brown
Brown
Fig. B.5 (a) Cable made by Hitachi Cable
Twisted–pairwireBinding tape
Shield braid
Sheath
Wire identification table (Oki)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
10
9
Orange
Gray
white
Yellow
Pink
Orange
Gray
White
Yellow
Pink
Red
Firstwire
Secondwire
Dot markcolor
Black–
–
–
–
–
– –
– –
– –
– –
– –
Drain wire
The numbers assigned to the wires correspond to the numbers in the table at right.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 Red
Red
Red
Red
Red
Red
Red
Red
Red
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Pair N
o.
Insulator color
Dot m
ark(1 pitch)
Fig. B.5 (b) Cable made by Oki Electric Cable
B–63393EN/02 B. 20–PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS AND CABLES
259
(a) Specifications
Item Unit Specifications
Product No. – A66L–0001–0286
Manufacturer – Oki Cable, Ltd.Hitachi Electric Cable Co., Ltd.
Rating – 80°C, 30V
Material Conductor,braid–shieldedwire,drain wire
– Strand wire of tinned annealed copper (JIS C3152)
Insulator – Heat–resistant flame–retardant vinyl
Sheath – Oilproof, heat–resistant, flame–retardant vinyl
Number of wires (wire ons.) Cores 6 (1 to 6) 6 (three pairs) (7 to 9)
Conductor Size mm2 0.5 0.18
Structure Conductors/mm
20/0.18 7/0.18
Outside diameter mm 0.94 0.54
Insulator Standard thickness (Theminimum thickness is at least80% of the standard thickness.)
mm 0.25 0.2
Outside diameter mm 1.50 0.94
Twisted pair Outside diameter mm 1.88
Direction of lay – Left
Pitch mm 20 or less
Lay – Twist the wires at an appropriate pitch so the outermost layeris right–twisted, and wrap tape around the outermost layer. Apply a cable separator as required.
Lay diameter mm 5.7
Drain wire Size mm2 0.3
Structure Wires/mm 12/0.18
Outside diameter mm 0.72
Shield braid Element wire diameter mm 0.12
Thickness mm 0.3
Braid density % 70
Outside diameter mm 6.3
Composite 12–corecable
B. 20–PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS AND CABLES B–63393EN/02
260
Item SpecificationsUnit
Sheath Color – Black
Standard thickness (Theminimum thickness is at least85% of the standard thickness.)
mm 1.1
Outside diameter mm 8.5Max. 9.0(1)
Standard length m 100
Packing method – Bundle
Electricalperformance
Electric resistance (at 20°C)(wire nos.)
Ω/km 39.4(1 to 6) 113(7 to 9)
Insulation resistance (at 20°C) MΩ–km 15
Dielectric strength (AC) V/min. 500
Flame resistance – Shall pass flame resistance test VW–1SC of UL standards,
NOTEThe maximum outside diameter applies to portions otherthan the drain wire.
(b)Cable structureThe cable structure is shown below.
The colors in the figure indicate the colors of insulators.
Drain wire
0.18–mm2 twisted pair wire
0.5–mm2 insulated wire
Binding tape
Shield braid
Sheath
Red
White
Black
1Black
2black
3black
4Red
5Red
6Red
7
8
9
Red
Black
White
B–63393EN/02 B. 20–PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS AND CABLES
261
(c) Specifications
Item Specification
FANUC specification number A66L–0001–0402 A66L–0001–0403
Manufacturer Oki Electric Cable Co., Ltd.
A–conductor B–conductor A–conductor B–conductor
Conductor Constitution Number of conductors/mm
16/0.12(0.18mm2)
3/22/0.12(0.75mm2)
16/0.12(0.18mm2)
7/16/0.12(1.25mm2)
Typical outside diameter(mm)
0.55 1.20 0.55 1.70
Insulation Color White, red, black Red, black White, red, black Red, black(polyester)
Typical thickness (mm) 0.16 0.23 0.16 0.25
Typical outside diameter(mm)
0.87 1.66 0.87 2.20
Pair twisting Constitution White–red, white–black, andblack–red
White–red, white–black, andblack–red
Direction of twisting LeftTypical pitch: 20 mm
LeftTypical pitch: 20 mm
Assembling by twisting
Number of strands or conductors
3 6 3 6
Direction of twisting Left Left
Taping Twisting is wrapped with washi, or Japanese paper, tape.
Twisting is wrapped with washi, or Japanese paper, tape.
Typical outside diameter(mm)
5.7 6.9
Braided shielding
Typical strand diameter(mm)
0.14
Typical density (mm) 80
Drain A 12/0.18 mm wire is roughly wrapped under braided shielding.
Typical outside diameter(mm)
6.4 7.6
Sheath Color Black (matted)(polyurethane)
Typical thickness (mm) 1.05 1.1
Vertical taping Vertically taped with washi under sheathing.
Outside diameter (mm) 8.50.3 9.80.3
Finished Typical length (m) 100assembly
Short size Basically not approved.
B. 20–PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS AND CABLES B–63393EN/02
262
Item Specification
FANUC specification number A66L–0001–0403A66L–0001–0402
Manufacturer Oki Electric Cable Co., Ltd.
B–conductorA–conductorB–conductorA–conductor
Finished Rating 80C 30Vassembly performance Standard Shall comply with UL STYLE 20236 and CSA LL43109 AWM I/II A 80°C 30V
FT–1.
Flame resistance Shall comply with VW–1 and FT–1.
Electrical Conductor resistance 103 or lower 25.5 or lower 103 or lower 15.0 or lowerperformance Ω/km (20°C)
Insulation resistanceMΩ/km (20°C)
1 or higher
Dielectric strengthV–min
A. C 500
Insulation performance
Tensile strengthN/mm2
9.8 or higher
Elongation % 100 or higher
Tensile strength after aging%
At least 70% of that before aging
Elongation after aging % At least 65% of that before aging
Aging condition For 168 hours at 113°C
Sheathing performance
Tensile strength N/mm2
9.8 or higher
Elongation % 100 or higher
Tensile strength after aging%
At least 70% of that before aging
Elongation after aging % At least 65% of that before aging
Aging condition For 168 hours at 113°C
Cable cross section
ÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅ
RedRed
White
Red
Black
BlackBlack
BlackRed
White
Black
Red
Tape Braided shielding
Twisted pair A
Solid wire B
Sheath
Drain
B–63393EN/02 B. 20–PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS AND CABLES
263
Item Unit Description
Specification – A66L–0001–0371
Manufacture – HITACHI CABLE CO., LTD.
Manufacture’s specification – CO–IREFV(0)–CX–75–SB 5X0.14SQ
Number of Conductors Core 5
Inside Con- Size mm2 0.14ductor
Components Conduc-tors
(PCS)/mm
7/0.16
Material – Tin–coated Soft Copper Wire
Diameter mm 0.48
Insulator Material (Color) – Polyethylene (White)
Thickness mm 0.71
Diameter mm 1.90
Outside Material – Tin–coated Soft Copper Wire (Rolled)Conductor
Diameter of Com-ponent–Wire
mm 0.08
Density % 95 or more
Diameter mm 0.2
Jacket Material – Vinyl
Color – Black. White. Red. Green. Blue
Thickness mm 0.15
Diameter mm 2.6
Twisted Assembly Diameter mm 7.1
Thickness of Paper Tape mm 0.05
Shieldbraid
Wire dia. Material mm 0.12 Tin–coaded soft copper wire
Density % 80 or more
Thickness mm 0.3
Diameter mm 7.8
Sheath Material, Color – Oil Tight Vinyl Black
Thickness mm 0.7 (Min. thickness: 0.56)
Finish Diameter mm 9.2 0.3
Conductor Resistance (20°C) /km 143 or less
Withstand Voltage (A.C.) V/min. 1000
Insulation Resistance (20°C) M–km 1000 or more
Impedance (10MHz) 75±5
Standard Capacitance (1MHz) nF/km 56
Standard Attention (10MHz) dB/km 53
Weight kg/km 105
Standard Length m 200
Package form – Bundle
5–core coaxial cable
B. 20–PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS AND CABLES B–63393EN/02
264
Black
Black
WhiteWhite
Blue
Red
Red
Green
Green
Blue
An example of circuit testing 20–pin interface cable
ΩResistor
Checkevery pin
PCB connector
Cable (20–pin interface connector)
PCR–E20LMD (Honda)
.
.
.
.
.
.
B–63393EN/02 C. CONNECTION CABLE (SUPPLIED FROM US)
265
C CONNECTION CABLE (SUPPLIED FROM US)
Maximum allowable cable length between units
Cable type Use and conditionMaximum
cable length(m)
I/O Link cable Electrical cable 10 m Note 2
Serial spindle cable Electrical cable (CNC to SPM) 20 m
MPG cable I/O module for operator’spanel–to–manual pulse generator
50 m
FSSB cable See APPENDIX D.
HSSB cable See APPENDIX D.
NOTE1 The maximum cable lengths listed above apply only when
the respective recommended cables stated in the text areused. If a non–recommended cable is used, the maximumcable length may not be guaranteed.
2 This cable can be extended to up to 15 m if it is used withinthe cabinet.
C. CONNECTION CABLE (SUPPLIED FROM US) B–63393EN/02
266
Purpose Description Specification Length
Manual pulsegenerator cable(for one unit)
Connectoroperator’s panelI/O module (JA3)
Manual pulsegenerator terminalboard
FI40–2015S
M3 crimp style terminal
A02B–0120–K847
7 m
I/O Link cable
Control unit (JD1A)
I/O unit (JD1B) PCR–E20FA
A02B–0120–K842
5 m
Control unit powersupply cable
Stabilized powersupply (24 VDC)
Control unit (CP1) AMP1–178288–3
M3 crimp style terminal
A02B–0124–K830
5 m
Serial spindlesignal cable
Control unit (JA41)
series amplifier(JA7B)
PCR–E20FA
A02B–0236–K810
5 m
B–63393EN/02 D. OPTICAL CABLE
267
D OPTICAL CABLE
The Series 18i–LNA uses optical cables for the following interfaces. Thistable lists the usable combinations.
Interface Recommended optical cable
Maximum allowabletransmission distance
Applicable junc-tion adapter
Remark
Serial spindle interface A66L–6001–0026#L~ 200 m A63L–0020–0002
High–speed serial bus A66L–6001–0026#L~ 100 m None(HSSB) interface (Note)
A66L–6001–0029#L~ 55 m A63L–0020–0004 For junction only
Serial servo bus (FSSB) A66L–6001–0023#L~ 10 m Noneinterface
A66L–6001–0026#L~ 100 m None
NOTEFor printed–circuit boards with the following former orderinginformation, the maximum allowable transmission distancewith –0026#L~ is lowered to 50 m, and connection withA63L–0020–0004 is impossible.
·A20B–8001–0580 ·A20B–8001–0581·A20B–8001–0640 ·A20B–8100–0100
D. OPTICAL CABLE B–63393EN/02
268
(1)Supported optical cables
(a) Internal cord type cable: A66L–6001–0023#LR
Cable length: 0.15 to 10 mCode diameter: 2.2 mm × 2 cordsTensile strength:
optical cord 7 kg per cordBetween optical cord and connector 2 kg
Minimum bending radius of optical cord: 25 mmOperating temperature: –20 to 70°C
7
6.7 14 max. 100 typ.
21
Unit: mm
Two cords are bound together.
Code
Fig. D.1 External dimensions of internal cord type cable
(b)External type cable: A66L–6001–0026#LR
A66L–6001–0029#LR
Cable length: 1 to 200 moptical cord diameter: 2.2 mm × 2 cordsDiameter of cable with reinforced cover: 7.6 mmTensile strength: Cable with reinforced cover – 75 kg
optical cord 7 kg per cordBetween optical cord and connector 2 kg
Minimum bending radius of optical cord: 25 mmMinimum bending radius of cable with reinforced cover: 50 mmBending resistance (cable with reinforced cover):
10 million bending cycles at room temperature (when the bending radius is 100 mm)
Flame resistance: Equivalent to UL VW–1Operating temperature: –20 to 70°C
8.2
6.7 19 max. 150 typ. 35 typ.
21
Unit: mm
Code Bush Reinforced cover
Fig. D.2 External dimensions of external cable
B–63393EN/02 D. OPTICAL CABLE
269
Table D.1 Standard cable length
Internal cord type cable External cable
A66L–6001–0023# A66L–6001–0026#
Specification Length Specification Length
L150R0 0.15 m L1R003 1.0 m
L300R0 0.3 m L2R003 2.0 m
L500R0 0.5 m L3R003 3.0 m
L1R003 1.0 m L5R003 5.0 m
L2R003 2.0 m L7R003 7.0 m
L3R003 3.0 m L10R03 10.0 m
L5R003 5.0 m L15R03 15.0 m
L7R003 7.0 m L20R03 20.0 m
L10R03 10.0 m L30R03 30.0 m
L50R03 50.0 m
L100R03 100.0 m
L200R03 200.0 m
2. Cable selection
Always use an external cable (A66L–6001–0026#~) when thecable is to be laid outside the power magnetics cabinet or main unitcabinet, where it may be pulled, rubbed, or stepped on.
Use an external cable when part of the cabling is to be subject tomovement. For example, when connecting a portable operationpendant box to the power magnetics cabinet, the use of an externalcable is desirable because the cable is likely to be bent, pulled, ortwisted repeatedly even though frequent system operation is notexpected. However, the force likely to be applied when the cableis installed or moved for maintenance purposes does not need to betaken into consideration.
Use an external cable in locations where sparks or flame are a danger.Although the internal cord type cable (A66L–6001–0023#~) iscovered by nonflammable resin, the cover, if exposed to frame fora long time, may melt, allowing the fiber cable inside to burn.
Use an external cable when the cable is expected to be pulled withconsiderable force during installation (the force applied to the cablemust be within the specified tensile strength limit at all times). Forexample, even though installing a cable in a cable duct can beregarded as internal cabling, a cable of the appropriate type mustbe selected according to the tensile force to be applied to the cableduring installation.
Both the internal cord type and external cables have the same oiland heat resistance properties.
D. OPTICAL CABLE B–63393EN/02
270
3. Procuring the cableAll the optical cables mentioned above are special cable products withoptical connectors, which are designed, produced, and tested to ensurethe required system performance and reliability. It is technicallyimpossible for users to produce these cables or process (cut andreconnect) them after purchase. Users are requested to purchase cablesof the necessary length from an appropriate supplier. Cables areavailable from either FANUC or any of the FANUC–approvedmanufacturers listed in Table D.2.
Table D.2 FANUC–approved cable manufacturers and cable modelnumbers (retail)
(1) Internal cord type cable A66L–6001–0023#LR
Manufacturer Model number Remarks
Japan AMP, Co., Ltd. –353373–
Japan Aviation ElectronicsIndustry, Ltd.
PF–2HB209–M–F–1 indicates thecable length (m).
Hirose Electric Co., Ltd. H07–P22–F2VCFA– indicates thecable length (m).
(2)External Cable A66L–6001–0026#LR
Manufacturer Model number Remarks
Japan AMP, Co., Ltd. –353199–
Japan Aviation ElectronicsIndustry, Ltd.
CF–2HB208–M–F–1 indicates thecable length (m).
Hirose Electric Co., Ltd. H07–P22–F2NCFA– indicates thecable length (m).
Oki Electric Cable Co., Ltd. OPC201HPXF–MB indicates thecable length (m).
4. Handling precautions
(1)Protection during storageWhen the electrical/optical conversion module mounted on theprinted circuit board and the optical cable are not in use, theirmating surfaces must be protected with the lid and caps with whichthey are supplied. If left uncovered, the mating surfaces are likelyto become dirty, possibly resulting in a poor cable connection.
B–63393EN/02 D. OPTICAL CABLE
271
Electrical/optical conversion module Lid
optical cable
optical cable caps
Fig. D.3 Protection of electrical/optical conversion module and optical cable (when not in use)
(2)optical cable• Make sure that the bending radius and tensile strength of the cable
are always within their ranges described in the specifications (seethe first item), regardless of whether the cable is stored or routedand whether operation is in progress or not.
• Although the reinforcing cover of the external cable has sufficientmechanical strength, be careful not to drop heavy objects on thecable.
• Grasp the optical connector firmly when connecting ordisconnecting the cable. Do not pull on the optical cord itself. (Themaximum tensile strength between the optical cord and connectoris 2 kg. Applying greater force to the cord is likely to cause theconnector to come off, making the cable unusable.)
• Once connected, the optical connector is automatically locked bythe lock levers on its top. To remove the connector, release the locklevers and pull the connector.
• Although optical connectors cannot be connected in other than thecorrect orientation, always take note of the connector’s orientationbefore making the connection.
• Before installing an external cable, fix either a wire with a hook ora tension member to the reinforcing cover of the optical connectorand pull the wire or tension member, as shown in Fig. D.4. Thisis done to prevent a tensile force from being applied between theoptical cord and connector. If no tensile force is applied betweenthe optical cord and connector when installing the cable, you canhold the reinforcing cover of the connector directly and pull it. Inthe case of an internal cord, which does not have a reinforcingcover, apply the same protective measures, as instructed in Fig.D.4, for that portion of the cable where the two cords are boundtogether, in order to prevent a tensile force from being appliedbetween the optical cord and connector. In the same way as for anexternal cable, if no tensile force is applied between the optical cordand connector during installation, you can hold the shielded part of
D. OPTICAL CABLE B–63393EN/02
272
the cable directly and pull it. Because the combined tensilestrength of the two cords is only 14 kg, however, avoid applyingtoo great a force to the cable during installation, regardless ofwhether you have taken the protective measures.
Optical connector
Reinforcing cover Wire with a hook
Tension member
Optical connectorReinforcing cover
Tape Tape
2 cords combined
Fig. D.4 Prior to installing a cable
Take care to keep both parts of the optical connector (cable side andPCB side) clean. If they become dirty, wipe them with tissue paper orabsorbent cotton to remove dirt. The tissue paper or absorbent cottonmay be moistened with ethyl alcohol. Do not use any organic solventother than ethyl alcohol.
Fix the reinforcing cover of the external cable or the cord bindingportion of the internal cord type cable by using a cable clamp, asshown in Fig. D.5, to prevent the weight of the optical cable frombeing applied directly to the connecting part of the opticalconnector.
(Recommended cable clamp): Recommended cable clamps are listed below. Use a clampthat grasps the optical cable lightly; the clamp should notapply excessive pressure to the cable.
For an external cable: CKN–13SP (with sponge)(Kitagawa Industry Co., Ltd.)
For an internal cord type cable: MN–1 (Kitagawa Industry Co., Ltd.)
B–63393EN/02 D. OPTICAL CABLE
273
Optical connector Optical cordReinforcing cover of externalcable or cord binding portion ofinternal cord type cable
Bending radius of 25 mm or more(Make the bending radius as large aspossible.)
Cable clampBending radius of 50 mm or more (for reinforcing cover)Bending radius of 25 mm or more (for cord binding portion)(Make the bending radius as large as possible.)
Fig. D.5 Fixing the cable with a clamp
Any superfluous portion of the cable may be wound into a loops.Should this prove necessary, make sure the diameter of each loopis at least 150 mm (for an external cable) or at least 100 mm (foran internal cord type cable). Winding the cable into smaller loopsmay produce sharp curves that exceed the specified bending radiuslimit without the user being aware. Such bending can result in agreater transmission loss, ultimately leading to a communicationfailure.
When using a nylon band (cable tie) as a cable clamp, follow theinstructions given below. Also, take care not to apply a bendingforce to one particular part of the cable when fixing it with a clamp.Failing to clamp the cable correctly may cut or damage it.External cable:Do not clamp the uncovered portion of the cable with a nylon band.When clamping the cable by the reinforcing cover, the clampingforce is not an important factor to consider. However, ensure thatthe clamping force is as small as possible to ensure that thereinforcing cover is not deformed by the clamping. If possible, theclamping force should be 5 kg or less.Internal cord type cable:Lightly clamp the optical cable with a nylon band so that the cableshield is not deformed. If possible, the clamping force should be1 or 2 kg (make sure that no force is applied to the cable). Due careis required when clamping the internal cord type cable because itscable shield is weaker than the reinforcing cover of the externalcable.
D. OPTICAL CABLE B–63393EN/02
274
5. Optical cable relay of FANUC I/O LinkWhen used for the FANUC I/O Link application, optical cables can beconnected by using an optical cable adapter, as follows.
(a) External view of an optical cable adapter
420.5
210.5
3.2
10.16
320.3
R1.6
18.2
0.5
2.2
6.6
8.2
(b)Example of the use of an optical cable adapter
Optical cable
Optical cable adapter (A63L–0020–0002)
Optical cable
Mounting board
NOTEUp to one relay points are permitte.
B–63393EN/02 D. OPTICAL CABLE
275
6. Optical cable relay of FANUC high–speed serial busWith the FANUC high–speed serial bus, special low–loss opticalcables can be connected by using a special low–loss optical relayadapter as an optical cable relay adapter.
(a) External view of the low–loss optical relay adapter
421.0
210.3
3.2
10.16
320.5
R1.6
18.1
2.2
6.6
8.2
(b)Example of use of the optical cable relay adapter
Low–loss optical cable
Low–loss optical relay adapter (A63L–0020–0004)
Mounting board
Low–loss optical cable
NOTEOnly one relay point is permitted.
D. OPTICAL CABLE B–63393EN/02
276
7. Precautions for connection with low–loss optical junction adapter
Features of and handling precautions for low–loss optical junctionadapter (A63L–0020–0004)When optical connectors for a conventional optical junctionadapter (A63L–0020–0002) are jointed, the facing ferrules(Note 1)are located about 60 um from each other. This is because the opticalcable of conventional PCF (plastic clad silica fiber) cables(A66L–6001–0008, –0009, –0026) may protrude from the tip ofthe ferrules (by up to about several um), resulting in the cableprotrusion being damaged when the ferrules are butted against eachother.In the low–loss optical junction adapter, the ferrules are buttedagainst each other, thus greatly reducing the reduction in repeaterloss. Therefore, the two optical cables used with the low–lossoptical junction adapters must be dedicated to the adapters.If a conventional PCF (plastic clad silica fiber) cable(A66L–6001–0008, –0009, –0026) is used as even one of the twooptical cables for joining the low–loss optical junction adapter,both cables may be damaged, resulting in deterioratedcharacteristics.
NOTEFerrule: Movable metal at the tip of an optical connector; thefiber is bonded to the ferrule.
Ferrule
Protective cover
Optical cableOptical connector
Features of low–loss optical cable (A66L–6001–0029)A low–loss optical cable is selected from conventional PCF opticalcables (A66L–6601–0026). The selected cable offers low loss, andits connector section is given special treatment; the cable ends areprovided with a depression so that the ferrules can be butted againsteach other. The two optical cables used with the low-loss opticaljunction adapter must be of low–loss type.
Appearance of the low–loss optical junction adapter and cable(how to distinguish them from conventional types)The body of the conventional optical junction adapter is black, butthat of the low–loss optical junction adapter is blue. In addition,the protective cover(Note 1) of the conventional PCF optical cableis black, but that of the low–loss optical cable is blue.
B–63393EN/02 D. OPTICAL CABLE
277
8. Installing the optical cable junction adapterThe optical cable junction adapter should be installed within a cabinet,as a rule. If it is impossible to avoid installing it within a cabinet,protect the adapter and the optical cable portions (such as connectorsand cords) not covered with reinforcement coating from the outside airby, for example, covering them with packing.
9. Environmental resistance of the optical cable junction adapter
The optical cable junction adapter is not waterproof. Even whenoptical cables are attached to both ends of the adapter, there are verysmall gaps in the linked portions, so water resistance can not beexpected.
When optical cables are attached to both ends of the junctionadapter installed in a normal environment (such as within acabinet), it is unlikely that dust will penetrate between the adapterand optical cable to the degree that it may hamper normal opticallinkage. If one or both ends of the adapter are left open, dust anddirt may accumulate even when the adapter is in a normalenvironment (such as within a cabinet). The dust and dirt on theadapter ends is likely to hamper normal optical linkage when theoptical cables are attached. In such a case, clean the junctionadapter and the optical connector using the optical cable junctionadapter cleaning method described below.
Do not allow cutting fluid to splash over the adapter or those opticalcable portions (such as connectors and cords) that are not coveredwith reinforcement coating. If the inside of the adapter and cableend surfaces are contaminated with cutting fluid, a malfunctionmay occur.
10.CleaningIf the optical cable junction adapter, optical–to–electrical conversionmodule, or optical cable are soiled, clean them according to thefollowing procedures.
Cleaning the optical cable junction adapter and optical-to-electricalconversion moduleFirst, clean the entire housing by wiping it with a cloth moistenedwith, or by washing it in, ethyl alcohol or HCFC141B (alternativeCFC; High Shower spray can DS–2168, manufactured by SunHayato). Similarly, wash the two sleeves in the adapter or wipethem with a cotton swab or the like.
D. OPTICAL CABLE B–63393EN/02
278
Cleaning optical cablesFor the optical cables, it is important to clean the connectors at theirends. Any soiling on the optical cable end surfaces will hamperoptical transmission, resulting in a malfunction. Wipe the opticalcable end surfaces (that is, the ferrule end surfaces) thoroughly witha soft, clean cloth (like gauze) moistened with ethyl alcohol orHCFC141B, in the same way as described above. The use of cottonswabs may prove convenient. The fiber end surfaces of low–lossoptical cables are lower than the ferrules. To remove any soilingfrom the cable end surfaces completely, push the cotton swab orgauze into the depressions all the way through while rotating theferrule. If the ferrules and optical connectors are contaminatedwith oily substances, and they may extend over a cleaned cable endsurface when it is attached to the optical-to-electrical conversionmodule, it is a good idea to wash them before wiping the opticalcable end surfaces, using the procedure stated above.
B–63393EN/02E. 10.4″ LCD UNIT (WITH TOUCH PANEL
AND OPERATOR’S PANEL I/O)
279
E 10.4″ LCD UNIT (WITH TOUCH PANEL AND OPERATOR’SPANEL I/O)
The touch panel is operated by directly touching the LCD screen. Fortouch panel operation, be sure to use the FANUC–supplied pen(A02B–0236–K111) provided with the touch panel. If the LCD screen istouched using a sharp–tipped pen, the surface of the LCD screen may bedamaged. Moreover, the LCD screen must not be touched by with yourfingers. Otherwise, the operability may be degraded, and the screen islikely to become dirty.
A protection sheet is attached the face of an LCD with a touch panel toprotect the thin film of the touch panel and LCD. If the protection sheetis damaged, it can be replaced. (The protection sheet is a consumablepart.)
1) Protection sheet A02B–0236–K110
2) Neutral detergent (detergent that can clean oily dirt off = detergentfor kitchen can be used)
3) Soft cloth (such as towel)
1) Before replacement
<1> Turn off the power to the machine.<2> Peel off the old protection sheet from the surface of the touch
panel.<3> Wipe off adhesive residue if any on the screen surface with
alcohol.<4> Use the detergent to remove oil or dirt stuck to the surface of the
touch panel.<5> With a soft, damp cloth, wipe off detergent completely.
If the touch panel surface becomes cloudy, oil is still left onthe surface. Remove oil completely.
If oil or detergent is left on the surface of the touch panel, theprotection sheet cannot adhere to the panel completely andwill sometimes peel off easily.
<6> With a dry soft cloth, wipe off moisture completely.
2) Applying the protection sheet
<1> Fold the tab over the front side (the side opposite to the backingsheet).
Fold
LCD with a touch panel
Protection sheet for thetouch panel
Replacing the protectionsheet Materials used
Replacement procedure
E. 10.4″ LCD UNIT (WITH TOUCH PANEL AND OPERATOR’S PANEL I/O) B–63393EN/02
280
<2> Peel off the backing sheet.
<3> Position the sheet, then attach the upper and lower sides of thesheet first. Check that the sides of the protection sheet do nottouch the escutcheon.
NGOK
<4> Attach the right and left sides of the protection sheet whilepushing out air between the touch panel and protection sheet.
With part of the protection sheet kept stuck to the touchpanel, do not attempt to correct the position of the protectionsheet by pulling the sheet.
<5> Press the adhesive parts of the four sides, and attach the entiresheet completely.
Check that the four corners and four sides of the protectionsheet do not float.
3) Checks after replacement
<1> Check that there is no wrinkle on the surface of the protectionsheet.
<2> After power–on, check that there is no touch panel portion keptpressed.
<3> Press the touch panel, and check that correct operation takesplace.
B–63393EN/02 F. PCMCIA INTERFACE
281
F PCMCIA INTERFACE
Internal data of the CNC can be input and output through the PCMCIAinterface located on the left side of the 10.4–inch LCD unit (with a touchpanel and operator’s panel I/O). When a detachable LCD/MDI is used,the PCMCIA interface in the controller is used.
As memory cards, flash ATA cards (those that can operate on 5 V) andcompact flash cards can be used.
1. Overview
Flash ATA card (5 V version) can be used for data input/output.Because the flash ATA card incorporates a storage device andcontroller, it enables data input/output for a personal computerequipped with a PCMCIA interface without using any special PC cardwriter.
2. Flash ATA card specification
The Flash ATA card must comply with the following standards andmust be of one of the following types. However, it is not guaranteedthat all ATA cards that comply with these standards will operatenormally in the CNC. See Section 3 for those ATA cards whosenormal operation has been confirmed by FANUC.
2–1 Card standards
The ATA card to be used in the CNC must comply with PCMCIA(Personal Computer Memory Card International Association) PCCard standard Release 2.1 and PCMCIA PC Card ATA Release1.02.
2–2 Card Shapes
PCMCIA Type I and Type II
2–3 Card Operation Mode
PC–ATA specification
2–4 Card Operating Voltage
ATA cards that can operate on 5 V (single voltage power source)and 5 V/3.3 V (automatic switching) can be used in the CNC.
3. ATA cards whose normal operation has been confirmed
The following table lists those ATA cards whose normal operation hasbeen confirmed by FANUC (as of October, 2000).
Overview
ATA CARD
F. PCMCIA INTERFACE B–63393EN/02
282
Manufacturer Model Storage capacity
Hitachi, Ltd. HB289016A4 16MB
HB289032A4 32MB
HB289048A4 48MB
Matsushita Electric BN–020AB 20MBIndustrial Co., Ltd.
BN–040AB 40MB
SanDisk SDP3B–20 20MB
SDP3B–40 40MB
NOTE1 FANUC does not guarantee the normal operation of any
ATA card other than those listed above.2 3.3 V versions of ATA cards cannot be used in the CNC.
4. Miscellaneous
The flash ATA card uses a quick format.If your flash ATA card has not been formatted, do so using apersonal computer.
Commercially available compact flash cards and compact flash cardadapters can be used.
The following tables list those compact flash cards and adapters of whichnormal operation has been confirmed by FANUC.
Compact flash card adapters
Manufacturer Model
I·O DATA PCCF–ADP
SanDisk PC CARD ADAPTER
Compact flash cards
Manufacturer Model Storage capacity
Hitachi, Ltd. HB289016C4 16MB
SanDisk SDCFB–16–505 16MB
I·O DATA PCCF–15MS 16MB
Hagiwara Syscom HPC–CF16X 16MB
NOTEFANUC does not guarantee normal operation when cardsnot listed in the above table are used.
Compact Flash cards
IndexB–63393EN/02
i–1
[Numbers]10.4″ LCD Unit (with Touch Panel and Operator’s
Panel I/O), 279
2 A Output DO Signal Specifications, 114
20–pin Interface Connectors and Cables, 249
7 segments LED display, 157
[A]Action Against Noise, 21
Additional Target Model, 250
An order of command handshake, 154
Arrangement of connector, 142
AS–i status, 150
Attaching/Detaching DeviceNet Board, 190
[B]Batteries, 40
Battery for Absolute Pulse Coder Built into the Motor(6 VDC), 42
Battery for Memory Backup (3VDC), 40
Board–mounted Connectors, 250
[C]Cable Clamp and Shield Processing, 26
Cable Connection, 213
Cable Connectors, 251
Cable for Power Supply to Control Unit, 39
Cable Length for Manual Pulse Generator, 136
Cabling Diagram, 31
CE Marking, 167
Checking the Input and Output Signals, 116
Command Execution by the Ladder Program, 152
Command interface of ladder program, 152
Commands that can be executed from the ladder pro-gram, 152
Configuration, 1
Configurations of Stand–alone Type Control Units, 2
Connecting Input power source, 146
Connecting the Ground Terminal of the Control Unit,24
Connecting the Servo Check Adapter, 74
Connection, 78, 145, 179, 188
Connection Cable (Supplied from Us), 265
Connection Diagram, 96
Connection Example of Relay Pins, 98
Connection of a Manual Pulse Generator, 129
Connection of AS–i terminal, 147
Connection of Basic and Extension Modules, 117
Connection of FANUC I/O Link by Electric Cable, 79
Connection of FANUC I/O Link Optical Cable, 80
Connection of FANUC I/O Link–AS–i Converter, 140
Connection of One to Two Serial Spindles, 70
Connection of Operator’s Panel I/O Module, 133
Connection of the Connector Panel, 93
Connection to CNC Peripherals, 43
Connection to FANUC I/O Link, 76
Connection with Input/Output Devices, 58
Connection with the 10.4″ LCD Unit (with the TouchPanel and Operator’s Panel I/O), 45
Connection with the Detachable LCD/MDI, 48
Connection with the LCD Unit, 44
Connector Layout, 121
Connector Panel I/O Modules Used, 93
Control Unit, 29
Control Unit Configuration and Component Names, 2
Cooling by Heat Exchanger, 18
[D]Dealing with Errors, 159
Design and Installation Conditions of the MachineTool Magnetic Cabinet, 16
Details of command flag and status, 153
Details of commands, 154
Details of I/O Link DI/DO, 149
DeviceNet board, 184
DI/DO Map on the I/O Link, 148
[E]Emergency Stop Signal, 168
Environment for Installation, 14
Environmental conditions, 141, 186
Environmental Requirements, 14
Error code, 153
External Dimensions of Each Unit and Connector, 217
External View, 137
Index B–63393EN/02
i–2
[F]FL–net Board, 192
[G]General connection diagram, 145
Ground, 23
[H]Handling Precautions, 175
Hardware Overview, 8
Heat Output of Each Unit, 19
Heat value, 140
High–speed Serial Bus (HSSB), 171
How to use I/O Link – AS–i Converter, 161
[I]I/O Connection of the Series 18i–LNA, 84
I/O Connector Pin Assignment, 124
I/O Link Assignment, 99, 123
input / output data area, 149
Input Signal Connection, 125
Input signal connection, 103
Input/Output Signal Specifications, 112
Installation, 13, 141, 142, 161
Installation Environment, 173
Installing the Control Unit, 29
Interface Connector, 212
Interface to the Servo Amplifiers, 73
[L]LED display, 157
LED Display and Setting Switch Operation, 156
List of slave, 151
[M]M–NET Board, 210
Manual Pulse Generator Connection, 135
Miscellaneous, 209
Monitoring Participating and Separated Nodes, 195
[N]Noise Suppressor, 25
Normal operation, 162
[O]Operator’s Panel I/O Connection for 10.4″ LCD Unit,
121
Optical Fiber Cable, 267
Ordering specification, 140
Other Notes, 118, 132, 139
Outer dimensions, 141
Outline, 140
Outline Drawing, 115
Output Signal Connection, 127
Output signal connection, 109
Overall Connection Diagram, 122, 133
[P]PCMCIA Interface, 281
Personal Computer Specification, 173
Pin assignment, 101
PLC Board Connector Layout, 178
PLC Interface Board, 176
Power Connection, 134
Power supply, 140
Power Supply Capacities of CNC–related Units, 15
Power Supply Capacity, 15
Power Supply Connection, 32, 97
Power supply connection, 123
Power Supply for the Control Unit, 34
Power turn–on/off sequence, 146
Power–off Sequence, 38
Power–on Sequence, 37
Procedure for Installing Personal Computer InterfaceBoards, 174
B–63393EN/02 Index
i–3
[R]Recommended Cables, 175
Recommended Connectors, Applicable Housings, andCables, 254
Refresh time, 189
RS–232–C Interface Specification, 60
RS–232–C Serial Port, 58
[S]Separating Signal Lines, 21
Serial Spindle, 70
Servo Interface, 72, 73
Setting switch, 158
Signal Connections, 101
Slave and master functions, 186
Specification, 140
Specifications, 131, 138, 185, 194
Specifications and Circuit Configuration of External24–VDC Power Supply, 34
Spindle Connection, 69
Straight and Right–angled Connectors (for Spring andScrew–fixing Connector Housings), 250
Strong point, 140
[T]Temperature Rise within the Cabinet, 18
Thermal Design of Operator’s Panel, 20
Thermal Design of the Cabinet, 18
Total Connection Diagrams, 9
Turning On and Off the Power to the Control Unit, 34
[U]Units that Can be Connected Using FANUC I/O Link,
83
[V]Vertical–type Connectors, 250
[W]Weight, 140
When the 10.4″ LCD Unit (with Touch Panel and Op-erator’s Panel I/O) is Used, 10
When the Detachable LCD/MDI is Used, 12
Wiring Inside the Operator’s Panel, 128
Rev
isio
n R
eco
rd
FAN
UC
Ser
ies
18i–
LN
A C
ON
NE
CT
ION
MA
NU
AL
(H
AR
DW
AR
E)
(B–6
3393
EN
)
02F
eb.,2
001
Add
ition
of f
ollo
win
g ite
ms
:
C
onne
ctio
n of
the
conn
ecto
r pa
nel
C
onne
ctio
n of
I/O
Lin
k–A
S–i
con
vert
er
F
L–ne
t boa
rd
M
–NE
T b
oard
Cor
rect
ion
of e
rror
s
01M
ar.,
2000
Edi
tion
Dat
eC
onte
nts
Edi
tion
Dat
eC
onte
nts
• No part of this manual may bereproduced in any form.
• All specifications and designsare subject to change withoutnotice.